IntroductionWelcome| 00:06 |
Running with Revit.
If you're involved with the design and
| | 00:09 |
construction of buildings, you've probably
heard about Autodesk's Revit Software
| | 00:12 |
Package.
In this course, we'll look at some
| | 00:15 |
high-level skills you'll need to get up
and running with Revit quickly.
| | 00:18 |
I've designed this course to work equally
well with the full version of Revit, as
| | 00:21 |
well as Revit LT.
So you can follow along with either
| | 00:24 |
version.
I'll start by showing you how to open an
| | 00:26 |
existing project and find your way around
using the project browser.
| | 00:29 |
This is like a table of contents for your project.
| | 00:32 |
Next, I'll show you how to create a new
project file and begin creating your
| | 00:35 |
building model.
In Revit, you create a virtual model
| | 00:38 |
representing your project in full 3D.
We'll see how to study the model as it
| | 00:43 |
evolves using custom 3D views and sections.
| | 00:46 |
We'll create documentation from a model
that includes a dimension floor plan and
| | 00:49 |
schedules that capture critical
quantities, and help to validate the
| | 00:52 |
design.
We'll be covering all of these features,
| | 00:56 |
plus plenty of other tools and techniques.
Now, if you're ready to get started, then
| | 01:00 |
let's get up and running with Revit.
| | 01:02 |
| | 59:59 |
(MUSIC).
Hi I'm Paul F Aubin and welcome to Up and
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 |
If you're a premium member of the
Lynda.com library, you have access to the
| | 00:03 |
exercise files used throughout this title.
The exercise files are in a folder called
| | 00:07 |
Exercise Files and I've placed them here
on my Desktop.
| | 00:09 |
You can place them wherever you like in
your own system.
| | 00:12 |
When you open the Exercise Files folder,
you'll find it organized into subfolders
| | 00:16 |
that are based on the various chapters of
the course.
| | 00:19 |
If you open up any of those chapter
folders, you'll find a collection of files
| | 00:22 |
that are in there that are referenced by
each of the lessons.
| | 00:25 |
Simply open those files when instructed to
do so to follow allow with me.
| | 00:29 |
If you're not a premium subscriber to
lynda.com, you don't have access to the
| | 00:31 |
exercise files but you can follow along
from scratch with your own files.
| | 00:35 |
So let's get started.
| | 00:36 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Getting StartedUnderstanding the different versions of Revit| 00:00 |
In this movie, I'd like to talk about the
various flavors of Revit.
| | 00:04 |
Revit comes in a few different varieties.
Let's start first with what's available
| | 00:08 |
for architecture.
There are essentially three overall
| | 00:11 |
versions.
We have Autodesk Revit or just the full
| | 00:14 |
version of Revit, which is part of the
Building Design Suite.
| | 00:18 |
And that includes actually disciplines.
Architecture, structure, and MEP.
| | 00:23 |
If you're using that version of Revit, you
have full access to all of the
| | 00:26 |
architectural features.
Now if you're using Revit Architecture,
| | 00:30 |
that's a standalone product.
It's not part of any suite and it includes
| | 00:33 |
just the architectural features and a
couple of the structural features.
| | 00:38 |
Now the most recent addition to the Revit
portfolio is Revit LT.
| | 00:41 |
And Revit LT is like a limited version of
the architectural product.
| | 00:46 |
It includes many of the features that are
available in Revit Architecture, but it's
| | 00:50 |
limited in the fact that some of the
features are not included.
| | 00:54 |
Most notably are things like some of the
collaboration tools and some of the
| | 00:57 |
rendering features that you might see in
the full versions of the product.
| | 01:02 |
Now, if you're involved in engineering,
the flavors of Revit that you have
| | 01:04 |
available are, of course, the full version
of Revit again, which is part of the
| | 01:07 |
Building Design Suite and includes all
three disciplines, arrchitecture, MEP, and
| | 01:11 |
structure.
Or you can get Revit MEP or Revit
| | 01:15 |
Structure as stand-alone products, which
are focused on just those disciplines in
| | 01:19 |
particular.
Now, for this course I'm going to focus
| | 01:23 |
mainly on the architectural flavors of Revit.
| | 01:25 |
So if you have any of the versions I
mentioned for architecture, the Building
| | 01:29 |
Design Suite version, Autodesk Revit,
Revit Architecture, the stand-alone
| | 01:33 |
product, or Revit LT, then you can watch
this course, and you'll have access to all
| | 01:36 |
of the functionality that I'll be discussing.
| | 01:41 |
If you're using MEP or Structure, you can
still watch this course, and many of the
| | 01:45 |
tools you'll find useful.
Some of the tools are platform tools or
| | 01:49 |
tools that apply across all disciplines.
And there are many architectural tools, so
| | 01:53 |
if you've got the suite version you'll
have access to those tools and you might
| | 01:56 |
find those useful in your work as well.
So what's missing from LT if you decided
| | 02:01 |
to use the LT version?
Well, specifically for the content we'll
| | 02:04 |
cover in this course, we're going to talk
a little bit about rendering.
| | 02:08 |
And we'll use the cloud-rendering feature,
that's what's available in LT, but LT does
| | 02:12 |
not have in-product rendering.
So you can't render directly in LT, you
| | 02:16 |
have to use the cloud-rendering feature,
which is an online service provided by
| | 02:19 |
Autodesk.
And some of the collaboration tools are
| | 02:22 |
missing as well.
You can do linked files, which we will be
| | 02:25 |
covering in the course, but you can't do
the interference-checking features, which
| | 02:29 |
we talked about.
And, also, work-sharing is not available
| | 02:33 |
in LT, so we'll be looking at how to open
up a Workshare project.
| | 02:36 |
But I'll discuss what the differences are
between Revit and LT at that time.
| | 02:40 |
If you want to learn more about what's
different between LT and the full version
| | 02:44 |
of the product, you can visit Autodesk's
website, and they provide a really nice
| | 02:48 |
comparison chart that goes point by point
and feature by feature, and details what
| | 02:53 |
the differences are between the full
version of Revit and the Revit LT product.
| | 03:00 |
So, feel free to visit that resource to
learn a little bit more.
| | 03:03 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening and navigating a project| 00:00 |
So you're ready to start exploring Revit,
this amazing tool for creating and
| | 00:03 |
documenting architectural projects.
And it begins with opening a project.
| | 00:07 |
So I'm here in Revit, and I'm looking at
the recent files screen.
| | 00:11 |
This is what greets me when I first launch
the software, and I don't have anything
| | 00:14 |
open just yet.
Now, there's two areas of the recent files
| | 00:17 |
screen.
We've got a Projects area here at the top,
| | 00:19 |
and then beneath that, we have a Families area.
| | 00:22 |
So there's two basic kinds of files that
we can open in Revit.
| | 00:26 |
A project file is your building file.
It contains all of the geometry, all of
| | 00:30 |
the information and features that make up
a building project.
| | 00:35 |
You can see some examples here in these
little preview windows.
| | 00:38 |
You can see we have the entire building
sitting in that single project file.
| | 00:42 |
Now, down here under Families, the icons
kind of give you a little hint of what
| | 00:45 |
they're for.
Families are little individual parts and
| | 00:48 |
pieces that you populate your buildings with.
| | 00:51 |
So you can see I've got a simple little
table there, or a truss.
| | 00:54 |
And we can bring those parts together, and
assemble them into our larger building
| | 00:58 |
structures.
Now, you can use both areas to either
| | 01:02 |
create or open existing files.
So there's an open link and a new link in
| | 01:06 |
both locations.
And in this movie, we're going to open up
| | 01:09 |
a project.
And we're going to take a look around.
| | 01:10 |
So we can see what Revit has to offer.
Now, one choice is to click this open link
| | 01:14 |
here which will open up a browse window.
Or you can go up here to the application
| | 01:19 |
menu, this big R, as folks refer to it.
And when you click that, it opens up the
| | 01:24 |
file menu.
Move your mouse down, but don't click yet.
| | 01:28 |
If we hover over the Open command, it will
highlight and it will give us choices on
| | 01:32 |
the right, and its the same basic choices.
We can open a Project or a Family.
| | 01:37 |
So, either way, whether I use the open
link back in recent files, or whether I do
| | 01:40 |
it this way here.
I'm going to get this Browse window that's
| | 01:45 |
going to let me open up a file, so I'm
just going to go to my exercise files
| | 01:48 |
folder and in the chapter one, I have this
file here called Restaurant.
| | 01:55 |
Now, if you have file extensions turned on
in Windows, you'll see that Revit files
| | 01:59 |
have this RVT extension, and you could see
that confirmed down here under files of
| | 02:03 |
type, Revit is looking for an RVT file.
So I'll simply click open, and that will
| | 02:10 |
load this file up into Revit.
Now, when the project first opens, it
| | 02:14 |
presents me the last open view that was
saved with this project.
| | 02:20 |
In this case, it's a Level 1 floor plan view.
| | 02:23 |
Now, what do I mean by that?
Well, All of the things you would
| | 02:25 |
traditionally think of as drawings in a
traditional set of architectural
| | 02:29 |
documents.
Floor plans, elevations, sections, 3D
| | 02:33 |
views.
These are going to be views in a Revit
| | 02:36 |
project.
So, if we look over here on the left hand
| | 02:39 |
side there's this pallete here called
project browser.
| | 02:42 |
And, right at the top of project browser
is this item called Views and in
| | 02:46 |
parentheses it says All.
That just means it's showing me all the
| | 02:49 |
views.
It's not filtered.
| | 02:51 |
And you could see that beneath that,
there's categories we've got structural
| | 02:54 |
plans and floor plans and ceiling plans
and so on.
| | 02:58 |
Right here, you could see that Level 1 is
bold and that's my Level 1 floor plan
| | 03:02 |
view.
That's the view that I'm looking at
| | 03:04 |
currently.
So let's look at some of the other views
| | 03:06 |
that are available in here.
I'm going to scroll down a little bit and
| | 03:09 |
I've got ceiling plans and I've got 3D views.
| | 03:12 |
Now, 3D views are really interesting
because of course they give me a three
| | 03:15 |
dimensional look at the entire building.
Now, I've got a couple to choose from
| | 03:18 |
here.
3D View 1 is a nice perspective view
| | 03:20 |
standing at the street level, and this one
that just says 3D with the little curly
| | 03:24 |
brackets around it, that's an axonometric.
I'm going to open up 3D View 1 by
| | 03:29 |
double-clicking on it.
And you could see it's as if we're
| | 03:32 |
standing at the street view, and we're
looking up here at the corner of the
| | 03:34 |
building.
Now, let's continue down a little bit.
| | 03:38 |
Let's say that you wanted to see an
elevation of this wall right here.
| | 03:42 |
Well, that's going to be the east elevation.
| | 03:43 |
So you can see here under Elevations, if I
just double-click East, now I'm looking
| | 03:47 |
straight-on at that elevation view.
Now, the views are not limited to just
| | 03:52 |
floor plans, elevations and 3D views.
We also have Schedule views in Revit.
| | 03:59 |
Now, schedules as you might be aware, are
just lists of items that are in your
| | 04:02 |
project like maybe a list of doors or a
list of windows and it's normally this
| | 04:05 |
laborious process of laying them out one
line at a time and typing in all that
| | 04:08 |
information.
In Revit, a schedule is actually just
| | 04:13 |
another live view of the model.
And so, what do I mean by that?
| | 04:17 |
Well, here you could see I've got a Door
Schedule, a Room Schedule, and a Window
| | 04:19 |
Schedule.
Well, we're looking at several windows
| | 04:22 |
right here, so let's go ahead and
double-click this Window Schedule and open
| | 04:25 |
that up.
And what you're going to see is not only
| | 04:28 |
that collection of windows that we looking
at, but actually all of the windows that
| | 04:31 |
are in this building are listed here in
this list automatically.
| | 04:35 |
To really kind of get a handle on how
powerful that is, what I'd like to do is
| | 04:38 |
take all these windows that I have open
right now And tile them together on the
| | 04:41 |
screen.
If you've used any kind of modern piece of
| | 04:45 |
software, maybe Microsoft Office or what
have you, you've seen a ribbon interface.
| | 04:49 |
So you've seen that most software these
days has these ribbon tabs across the top.
| | 04:54 |
And when you click on them, there's a
series of icons.
| | 04:56 |
What I want to do is click this View tab
right here.
| | 04:59 |
And that changes the list of icons that
are available here.
| | 05:01 |
And way over on the right hand side
there's this button called Tile Windows,
| | 05:04 |
and I want to click that.
Now, when I do, that'll take the four
| | 05:08 |
windows that I currently have open and it
will just tile them onscreen so I can see
| | 05:11 |
them all at the same time.
Now, I want to adjust what I'm seeing, so
| | 05:16 |
I'm going to click in the 3D View window here.
| | 05:20 |
It doesn't really matter which one I click in.
| | 05:21 |
And If you look over at the right hand
window there's a little ghosted out
| | 05:25 |
toolbar.
And as I move closer to it, it will light
| | 05:28 |
up.
So I come over here and I'm going to click
| | 05:30 |
this small little drop down.
And the command I'm looking for is Zoom
| | 05:34 |
All to Fit.
Now, if it's already got a check box next
| | 05:37 |
to it, all I need to do is click this
little icon.
| | 05:40 |
And that will run that command.
And it does exactly as its name implies.
| | 05:44 |
It zooms all of the view windows to fit
their frames.
| | 05:47 |
So now, we can see all of them simultaneously.
| | 05:49 |
Now, let's take a look at just how
powerful this building model that we're
| | 05:52 |
looking at is here in Revit.
We are seeing a virtual model of our
| | 05:56 |
building.
We're seeing it in 3D, in elevation, and
| | 05:59 |
in plan.
We're even seeing it here in a tabular
| | 06:02 |
format in a schedule.
Now, watch what happens if I just click in
| | 06:05 |
this schedule item here.
This first line item.
| | 06:08 |
And notice what happened in the other
three views.
| | 06:12 |
Over here, this window lights up in blue
in all three locations.
| | 06:16 |
Now, it's a little tough to see in the
planned view.
| | 06:17 |
But you can see it a little more clearly
in the 3D and the elevation.
| | 06:20 |
As I click through different items here in
the schedule, you'll see them light up
| | 06:24 |
accordingly in the various views.
That item that I have selected is that
| | 06:29 |
window.
So if I were to do something dramatic with
| | 06:33 |
that window selected like, for example, if
I came up here to this Rose panel and
| | 06:36 |
clicked Delete, Revit will warn me that
I'm actually deleting the object from the
| | 06:39 |
model.
And if I'm undeterred by this warning and
| | 06:43 |
I click OK, watch what happens in the two
graphical views.
| | 06:47 |
Notice that that window is no longer there.
| | 06:49 |
Okay, so that kind of proves to you, or
shows you, that these are live views of
| | 06:53 |
the model.
If I were to select one of the windows
| | 06:57 |
here in the elevation, I can change the
kind of window that it is, interactively
| | 07:01 |
on the fly.
So I've got it selected.
| | 07:06 |
And then, over here I've got a palette
called Properties.
| | 07:09 |
Now, at the very top of this palette it
says that that's a fixed window that's 36
| | 07:12 |
inches by 72 inches.
I'm going to open up that drop down list
| | 07:16 |
and I'm going to choose a really small
size so, it'll be really obvious what just
| | 07:19 |
happened.
So, I'm going to choose the very first one
| | 07:22 |
on the list here, 16 by 24.
Notice that the window becomes tiny here
| | 07:26 |
in the elevation, but notice also in the
schedule that the size immediately
| | 07:30 |
changes.
These two things cannot get out of sync
| | 07:33 |
because they're not separate drawings,
they're just part of the same overall
| | 07:37 |
building model.
So when you open a project in Revit, it's
| | 07:40 |
as if you're stepping into the actual building.
| | 07:43 |
And just like, in real life if you went
over and picked up a chair and moved it or
| | 07:46 |
you brought in a new piece of equipment.
It would be there, everywhere, for
| | 07:50 |
everyone to see.
The same is true in a Revit project.
| | 07:53 |
So as we explore Revit further throughout
this course, keep that in mind that that's
| | 07:57 |
one of the most powerful benefits of using
the Revit software package.
| | 08:01 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Opening a collaborative team project| 00:00 |
In this movie, I want to talk briefly
about what we do when we have a multiple
| | 00:04 |
user team.
In Revit, your entire project lives in a
| | 00:08 |
single project file.
This raises a problem when you have more
| | 00:11 |
than one person on a team because only one
person can access the project file at a
| | 00:14 |
given time.
So this would not make it very practical
| | 00:18 |
for teams to work together.
So what Revit offers is a feature called
| | 00:22 |
work sharing.
With work sharing, you have a central
| | 00:25 |
file.
And this file is typically stored on a
| | 00:28 |
network server, can be any network server,
any map drive will do the job.
| | 00:33 |
And then, each user on the project team
creates what we call a local version or a
| | 00:37 |
local copy of this file that they actually
do the data they are working.
| | 00:43 |
The local copy is created literally on the
local hard drive.
| | 00:47 |
And it maintains a connection back to the
central file.
| | 00:51 |
And what happens is every so often the
users on the team will synchronize with
| | 00:54 |
the central file.
That will take their changes and publish
| | 00:58 |
them to the central file and any changes
made by their colleagues and bring them
| | 01:01 |
down and update their local copy.
In so doing, everybody is able to work
| | 01:06 |
together on a project team and all make
changes to various parts of the project.
| | 01:10 |
Now, I should also mention that if you're
using Revit LT, the worksharing feature is
| | 01:14 |
not available in Revit LT.
So, Revit LT was designed for single
| | 01:19 |
person offices.
You know, where one or two people work
| | 01:23 |
there, and they're working on there own
stand alone projects.
| | 01:26 |
So, if you're working with Revit LT,
you're basically going to follow the steps
| | 01:29 |
that we did in the previous movie over the project.
| | 01:32 |
Now, the challenge we have is, in a video
course such as this, it's a little
| | 01:36 |
difficult for me to demonstrate and
certainly to provide a exercise file for
| | 01:40 |
you to work in on this.
So what I'm going to do is simply
| | 01:46 |
demonstrate the process that you follow to
open and create a local copy.
| | 01:50 |
But I definitely recommend that you talk
to your IT professionals or your BIM or
| | 01:54 |
CAD manager, and get the details of how
things are done in your firm.
| | 01:58 |
Think of this as really just an overview
of the concept and a tool to help you get
| | 02:01 |
started.
So, what I've done is setup sort of a
| | 02:05 |
simulated network here on my system and
I've created a file called Workshare.
| | 02:09 |
And let me show you how you would access
that if it's a worksharing file.
| | 02:14 |
So, I would use my Open link or I could go
to my application menu to get there and go
| | 02:18 |
to my network server.
In this case, it's on my D drive.
| | 02:23 |
And I've just created a file called Your
Office Network to simulate this location.
| | 02:27 |
When I open that file and I select the
central file.
| | 02:31 |
In this case, it's a file called Workshare.
| | 02:33 |
The most important setting is down here at
the bottom of the screen.
| | 02:38 |
There's this Create New Local checkbox.
And we want to absolutely make sure that
| | 02:43 |
that's checked.
Now, it's checked by default, so you
| | 02:45 |
shouldn't have to do anything here.
It should already be that way.
| | 02:48 |
But you want to just double-check before
you click open that that's checked.
| | 02:52 |
And what that will do is, instead of
opening the central file, which we don't
| | 02:55 |
want to do, that would be considered a bad
thing, we want to make sure we're creating
| | 02:59 |
a local copy.
Let me show you what that looks like, if I
| | 03:03 |
restore this down here.
Here's the file called work share.
| | 03:06 |
And notice that at the end of that file,
it's added my username Paul Aubin.
| | 03:12 |
So I'm now working on a local copy of this
work share enabled project.
| | 03:18 |
I could go about my work, make whatever
changes I want to make.
| | 03:21 |
And then when I'm ready, I would go the
Collaborate tab or the Quick Access
| | 03:26 |
toolbar and use my Synchronize with
Central command.
| | 03:31 |
And you can see it located right here and
right here.
| | 03:34 |
This would maintain the location back to
the central file, it knows were that file
| | 03:38 |
lives and when I click OK, it would update
any changes that I've made to the central
| | 03:42 |
file and if any of my colleagues had made
any changes, it would pull those changes
| | 03:46 |
down, and update my local copy as well.
That's the way most teams are working
| | 03:54 |
together using a Revit environment.
Now, for the remainder of the course,
| | 03:58 |
we're going to work in stand-alone projects.
| | 04:00 |
I definitely recommend you talk to some of
your colleagues and your CAD and BIM
| | 04:03 |
manager and make sure that you've got the
process down for what you do there at your
| | 04:06 |
firm.
But that's the basic steps that are
| | 04:08 |
involved in opening and creating a new
local file.
| | 04:11 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Introducing the interface| 00:00 |
When you first open a program like Revit,
it can be a little bit daunting when you
| | 00:03 |
see all the buttons and controls and other
settings flowing around the screen.
| | 00:07 |
So in this movie I'd like to just give you
a quick tour.
| | 00:10 |
This is like the five minute tour that you
get when you go to a friend's house.
| | 00:13 |
And they show you kind of where the living
room is and the bathroom and the other
| | 00:15 |
things around the house so you can find
your way around and feel a little more
| | 00:18 |
comfortable.
Let's take our quick tour of Revit here,
| | 00:22 |
and we'll start in the upper corner here
with the application menu.
| | 00:27 |
Often people will refer to this
affectionately as the big R.
| | 00:30 |
So the big R is basically a File menu.
You've got New commands, Open commands,
| | 00:35 |
Save, Save As, Print, commands like that.
Any time you want to do any file in or
| | 00:40 |
file out, think big R.
Next to that is the Quick Access toolbar.
| | 00:47 |
So we've got New and Save and Undo/Redo up
there, but we also have some of the most
| | 00:50 |
commonly used commands, things like
measure and dimensions and text and so on.
| | 00:56 |
Beneath that, we have the ribbon.
It's organized into tabs.
| | 00:59 |
We have Architecture tab, and Insert tab,
and Annotate tab.
| | 01:03 |
Your tabs might vary slightly, depending
on the actual flavor of Revit that you
| | 01:06 |
have.
But what they all have in common is that,
| | 01:09 |
each tab just includes a collection of buttons.
| | 01:13 |
Usually, those buttons are grouped into a panel.
| | 01:16 |
So, for example, here, in the Architecture
tab, we have a Build panel, which includes
| | 01:20 |
the most common building tools.
And then a Circulation panel and so on.
| | 01:24 |
And then you have your individual buttons
on those panels.
| | 01:28 |
And so, this is very common in most
software like Office or other programs,
| | 01:31 |
where all the commands are listed on the ribbon.
| | 01:36 |
Beneath the ribbon is this little gray
bar, which is currently empty.
| | 01:39 |
So I'm going to click the Wall tool to
show you what that might look like.
| | 01:43 |
If I were drawing a wall, you'll see the
Option bar lights up with a bunch of
| | 01:46 |
options specifically for this command.
You want to keep your eye on the options
| | 01:51 |
bar as you're working, because it will
change frequently.
| | 01:54 |
Each time you run a different command,
you'll get a different set of options.
| | 01:58 |
If I cancel outta this command by pressing
my Escape key and I click the Door tool
| | 02:01 |
instead, you'll see that I get slightly
different options.
| | 02:05 |
So I'll escape out of there and the
left-hand side of the screen I have two
| | 02:08 |
palettes.
I have Properties palette and Project
| | 02:11 |
browser.
Now these are the default locations for
| | 02:13 |
these palettes but you can move them around.
| | 02:16 |
So if you don't see them in this location
on your screen, they are probably on your
| | 02:18 |
screen somewhere.
If you don't see them anywhere on your
| | 02:22 |
screen, go to the View tab.
Way over here on the right-hand side
| | 02:27 |
you'll find a user interface drop-down,
and when you click on it, Project browser
| | 02:31 |
and Properties should both have a check
mark in them.
| | 02:35 |
If they don't, you can check them and
they'll come back again and you can move
| | 02:38 |
them wherever you'd like them to be.
I'm going to leave them in the default
| | 02:41 |
positions, as you see over here on the left.
| | 02:44 |
The properties palette is just that.
It's a palette that we use to access the
| | 02:47 |
properties of objects that we have
selected on screen or objects that we're
| | 02:50 |
creating.
And the Project browser is a place where
| | 02:55 |
we see all of the views in our project organized.
| | 02:58 |
Our plans, our sections, our elevations.
And you just simply double-click on a view
| | 03:02 |
when you want to open it up, and work in
that view.
| | 03:05 |
And we briefly looked at the Project
browser in a previous movie.
| | 03:07 |
Now, at the very bottom of the screen is a
Status bar and the thing you want to be
| | 03:10 |
looking for there is little messages from Revit.
| | 03:14 |
So, you can see right now the current
message says, Click to select and TAB for
| | 03:16 |
alternate.
So, it gives you helpful information as
| | 03:19 |
you're working, so as your mouse changes
position on screen, the message might
| | 03:23 |
change.
So you can see that as I highlight
| | 03:26 |
different elements on the screen.
I'm not clicking.
| | 03:28 |
I'm just moving my mouse over them and
they're highlighting, I'm getting
| | 03:30 |
different messages.
So it's just a feedback mechanism that
| | 03:33 |
Revit uses.
Over here on the right-hand side of the
| | 03:36 |
View window is a small little toolbar that
is grayed out, if your mouse is far away
| | 03:40 |
from it.
But as your mouse gets closer to it, it
| | 03:43 |
brightens up and becomes more bold.
Now it includes navigation tools.
| | 03:48 |
So what I would like to do right now is
show you how we can navigate onscreen.
| | 03:52 |
So I'm in a floor plan and it's kind of
far away and I'd like to zoom in a little
| | 03:54 |
bit closer.
There are several ways that you can do
| | 03:57 |
that using the drop-down menu right here
on this toolbar.
| | 04:01 |
The default is to zoom in a region.
But you could see there' re several other
| | 04:05 |
options here.
So I'm going to click right on that icon.
| | 04:07 |
Zoom in a region.
And that will give me a little magnifying
| | 04:10 |
glass.
And all I have to do is click and drag a
| | 04:13 |
rectangle and it will zoom in on that rectangle.
| | 04:18 |
And so, I can get a better look at what
I'm seeing.
| | 04:21 |
If I click it again, I can zoom in even closer.
| | 04:25 |
And let's say I want to back up one step.
Well, then I would just change tools.
| | 04:29 |
I would go to this drop-down and say
Previous Pan and Zoom.
| | 04:32 |
If I do it a second time, (SOUND) it would
keep going back again.
| | 04:36 |
Now, let's zoom in maybe on this location here.
| | 04:42 |
And then, I decide I want to see the
entire screen again.
| | 04:45 |
Well, if I open that up, that is the Zoom
to Fit command.
| | 04:50 |
We have other options here like Zoom
Out(2x), which I think is pretty
| | 04:53 |
self-explanatory.
And we even have a really interesting one
| | 04:56 |
here called Zoom to Sheet Size, which
basically looks at this scale down here at
| | 05:00 |
the bottom of the window, eighth inch
equals a foot in this case.
| | 05:05 |
And it zooms the screen to match that scale.
| | 05:08 |
If I take a look at roughly how big
everything is here on screen, and if I
| | 05:11 |
were to change the scale (SOUND) and then,
click this command again, you'll see that
| | 05:16 |
it zooms in much closer if it was quarter inch.
| | 05:21 |
And if it was sixteenth of an inch, it
zooms out a little bit further.
| | 05:27 |
Notice that the scale that you have the
drawing set to, I'm going to go back to
| | 05:31 |
eighth inch, will have a big impact on the
way this Zoom to Sheet Size command will
| | 05:35 |
work.
And that just gives you a rough idea of
| | 05:39 |
what it will look like when you print the
drawing out.
| | 05:43 |
Now the final way that you can zoom and
pan is probably the easiest way and the
| | 05:46 |
most user friendly way and that's to use
the wheel on your mouse.
| | 05:51 |
If you roll the wheel down, Revit zooms out.
| | 05:55 |
If you roll it up, it zooms in.
It zooms in or out around the point where
| | 06:00 |
your cursor is located.
So if I move my cursor closer to this
| | 06:04 |
column and zoom out, it stays centered on
that column.
| | 06:08 |
If I move it next to this table, it zooms
in on that table.
| | 06:12 |
You don't have to click anything.
Just move your mouse there and zoom in or
| | 06:16 |
out, and it will focus on that location.
If you hold the wheel in and drag, you
| | 06:21 |
keep the magnification constant and you
just pan the screen.
| | 06:26 |
So you can pan by dragging.
You can zoom by rolling.
| | 06:29 |
And so those are some ways that you can
navigate around the screen, and there's
| | 06:33 |
your quick overview of the Revit interface.
| | 06:36 |
And so, hopefully, those two will help you
feel a little bit more acclimated, a
| | 06:39 |
little bit more comfortable, in working in
the Revit environment.
| | 06:42 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing a template file| 00:00 |
Knowing how to open existing projects is
important but knowing how to create your
| | 00:03 |
own project is equally important.
So in this movie I'd like to look at the
| | 00:06 |
ways that we can create a new Revit project.
| | 00:10 |
So I'm looking at the recent file screen
that will greet me when I first launch
| | 00:12 |
Revit.
And up here in the Projects location we
| | 00:15 |
have an open link which we used in the
previous few movies.
| | 00:18 |
And right beneath that we have a new link.
Now beneath that we also have several
| | 00:23 |
predefined items.
There's a construction template,
| | 00:26 |
architectural template, structural, and so on.
| | 00:29 |
It's possible for you to create a new
project from scratch, but that's typically
| | 00:32 |
not the recommended approach.
What you typically want to do is start a
| | 00:36 |
new project from a template.
Now, a template file in Revit is pretty
| | 00:39 |
similar to a template file in really any
piece of software.
| | 00:42 |
It's essentially a starting point.
That template file contains within it, all
| | 00:46 |
of the settings and configuration that you
would typically want to have at the
| | 00:49 |
beginning of any new project.
The goal in creating a good template is to
| | 00:53 |
think about all of those settings and all
of those features you would want any new
| | 00:56 |
project to have.
And then you can save that as a template.
| | 01:00 |
And Revit ships with some basic templates
to get us started.
| | 01:04 |
So if you wanted to, you could simply
click one of these links and start with
| | 01:07 |
one of those templates.
So if your discipline is architectural,
| | 01:11 |
you could click this architectural
template, and it will start you with a
| | 01:15 |
basic starting point that's suitable for a
pretty simple architectural project.
| | 01:20 |
Now, let me just take a quick look around
and show you what you get when you start
| | 01:23 |
with this architectural template.
Over here on the project browser under
| | 01:28 |
views, you'll see that we've got a few
floor plans, a couple ceiling plans, and
| | 01:32 |
four basic building elevations.
So those elevations are actually these
| | 01:36 |
little symbols right here on screen.
And so, we've got a north, south, east,
| | 01:40 |
and west.
Now this is a really basic template and it
| | 01:43 |
only has a few settings within it.
Some other things that you would find in
| | 01:48 |
this template is some standard content.
So, I'm going to click this component
| | 01:52 |
button here on the ribbon, and then open
up the list here.
| | 01:55 |
And you can see that the content that's
included in this basic architectural
| | 02:00 |
template is a desk, a parking space, and a tree.
| | 02:03 |
Not a whole lot by any stretch, there's a
couple support items down here at the
| | 02:07 |
bottom.
But, you know, some really basic, simple
| | 02:10 |
items to get you started.
I'm going to click the Modify tool here to
| | 02:13 |
cancel.
Let's contrast this with one of the other
| | 02:16 |
templates that are also available.
So I'm going to go to the big R menu > New
| | 02:23 |
> Project.
I'm going to click on Project, and that's
| | 02:27 |
going to open up the new project dialogue.
I'll get the same list of built-in
| | 02:31 |
templates.
There's the construction template, the
| | 02:33 |
structural, the mechanical.
And there's also this Browse button right
| | 02:36 |
here.
So I'm going to click on Browse.
| | 02:39 |
And all of the templates that are
installed with my system will be listed
| | 02:42 |
here in this folder.
The one that I want to choose here is the
| | 02:47 |
Commercial-Default.
If you're using Revit LT, the name is
| | 02:51 |
slightly different but the template is
essentially the same.
| | 02:55 |
So, I'm going to click Open here to open
that Commercial-Default and then OK.
| | 03:00 |
And if you look at the Project Browser
this time, you're going to see that
| | 03:03 |
there's a few more views here under Floor Plans.
| | 03:08 |
We still have the same four elevation views.
| | 03:11 |
If we scroll down a little further, we've
got some schedules.
| | 03:15 |
Door Schedule, Window Schedule, and so on.
And we've got some sheets.
| | 03:19 |
Now, a sheet is just simply a title block
that has on it the Viewport that looks
| | 03:24 |
into one of those views up above.
So this is a Viewport of our reflected
| | 03:30 |
ceiling plan, which is this view right here.
| | 03:34 |
That's what you see in this Viewport right there.
| | 03:37 |
So these sheets are already set up.
So you can imagine that if your company
| | 03:40 |
had a standard title block, that standard
title block could already be loaded here
| | 03:43 |
in this template.
So that when you start a new project, you
| | 03:47 |
automatically get the standard title
block, and all the other settings.
| | 03:51 |
Now let's just go back to the Level 1
Floor Plan here.
| | 03:54 |
Let's click that Component button again.
And, you'll notice here that we've got a
| | 03:57 |
few more items this time than we had in
the standard architectural template.
| | 04:01 |
There's a, a light fixture here.
There's a toilet fixture here.
| | 04:04 |
So, there's a couple more things.
You may prefer to start with one of these
| | 04:07 |
templates instead of that standard
architectural one but the choice is really
| | 04:11 |
up to you.
I'm going to click the Modify tool to
| | 04:14 |
cancel.
For the project that we're going to build
| | 04:16 |
in the next chapter, I'm going to start
here with this commercial template just
| | 04:19 |
because it has a few more of those items
in it.
| | 04:23 |
So, what I'm going to do is go to my big R
> Save.
| | 04:26 |
Because I've never named this project,
it's going to ask me for a name.
| | 04:30 |
I'm going to put it on my desktop and give
it a name.
| | 04:33 |
So when you want to create a new project
in Revit, it's as simple as choosing an
| | 04:36 |
appropriate template to base your project on.
| | 04:40 |
Once you've got that template opened up
you can save it, give it a name, and then
| | 04:43 |
proceed to start adding your building geometry.
| | 04:47 |
So in the next chapter we'll begin adding
geometry to this project and building our
| | 04:50 |
building model.
| | 04:51 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. Building a ModelSetting up levels and grids| 00:00 |
In the previous chapter, we took a quick
look around the Revit environment and we
| | 00:03 |
learnt how to open and create projects.
So, I made a file called Levels and Grids,
| | 00:07 |
and this was created from the commercial
template project at the end of the last
| | 00:10 |
chapter.
This is just the default commercial
| | 00:12 |
template, nothing has been changed yet.
And what I want to start off with is, most
| | 00:16 |
buildings have some floor levels and many
buildings have some sort of a column grid.
| | 00:22 |
locations where the columns occur.
Both of these things we can designate in
| | 00:25 |
Ravit.
We can add floor levels that actually
| | 00:27 |
represent the actual stories of the
building, the actual floor levels of the
| | 00:30 |
building, a landing on the stairs, or a
button on the elevator if you will.
| | 00:35 |
And we can create column grids that locate
where the various columns will be.
| | 00:39 |
So, in this movie I'd like to do both of
those things to kind of get this set up so
| | 00:41 |
that we can start adding geometry.
So, the way that you add levels is to go
| | 00:46 |
to one of your elevation views.
So, I'm going to scroll down here on the
| | 00:50 |
project browser to my elevations.
And it doesn't really matter which one I
| | 00:53 |
open.
So, I'm going to open up the South
| | 00:55 |
Elevation just by double clicking it.
And as you can see, I've got several
| | 00:59 |
dashed lines running across the screen.
Now, these dashed lines represent the
| | 01:03 |
edges of the floor level.
So, think of this as the finished floor
| | 01:07 |
height for level one.
I've got it highlighted, you can see that
| | 01:10 |
one is level one.
Now, I'm going to come over here and put
| | 01:13 |
my mouse at this right hand side, and I'm
going to roll it slightly to zoom in, just
| | 01:16 |
so we can read those labels a little bit better.
| | 01:20 |
And you can see that in addition to level
one, I have two footing levels and I have
| | 01:24 |
a roof level.
If we scroll back up here in the project
| | 01:28 |
browser, levels are the primary data
element in your project.
| | 01:33 |
So, they're like a horizontal plane that
cuts through the building and establishes
| | 01:37 |
a height.
Furthermore, levels can be associated with
| | 01:41 |
floor plans.
So, if you look here on screen, you see
| | 01:44 |
this level one.
You'll notice that the name is level one
| | 01:47 |
and there's a corresponding level one
floor plan, and level one ceiling plan.
| | 01:52 |
So, both of those are associated to this
level one floor plan.
| | 01:57 |
Notice here there's a roof level floor plan.
| | 02:00 |
There's also a bottom of footing, and a
top of footing.
| | 02:03 |
Now, for this project, we're going to keep
it relatively simple.
| | 02:07 |
So, let's go ahead and add another level
to this building, I want to add a second
| | 02:09 |
floor to this building.
So, I'm going to drag with my wheel
| | 02:12 |
slightly to give myself a little bit of room.
| | 02:15 |
And I could rename the roof level and then
add a new roof up above, but I actually
| | 02:19 |
find it easier to select my roof level.
I'm going to click right on the text here
| | 02:23 |
that makes up the height of that level,
it's currently at 12 foot 8, and I'm
| | 02:27 |
going to change that to 30, and press Enter.
| | 02:31 |
That will move the roof up to 30 feet, and
allow plenty of space here in between for
| | 02:36 |
me to add the new level.
Now, to add the new level I'm going to
| | 02:41 |
zoom back out so, I can see the full
extent of the level.
| | 02:46 |
And then here on the Architecture tab,
over here on the Datum panel on the right,
| | 02:51 |
I will find a Level button.
I'm going to click that.
| | 02:57 |
If you move your mouse around in the
middle of the space between level one and
| | 03:00 |
roof toward the end, you'll see a small
little dashed line appear when you're
| | 03:03 |
lined up with the end.
So, I want to make sure it's lined up with
| | 03:06 |
the end, and I'm going to click.
And them I'm going to drag it over to the
| | 03:10 |
opposite end, and again, make sure it
lines up with that little dashed line.
| | 03:14 |
And when it does, I'll click again.
Now, what you'll see is that that actually
| | 03:19 |
created the level, and over here I get a
level two floor plan, I get a level two
| | 03:23 |
ceiling plan, and there's actually now a
level to structural plan.
| | 03:31 |
Now, it turns out I didn't really want the
level two structural plan so, I can
| | 03:35 |
actually just select it here on the
project browser and delete it.
| | 03:40 |
Okay.
So, I'm only interested in the floor plans
| | 03:42 |
and ceiling plans at the moment.
Now, I going to click back over here in
| | 03:46 |
the drawing window, click my Modify tool
to cancel the command.
| | 03:51 |
I want to select it here, and I want to
make sure that that level two is at 16
| | 03:54 |
feet.
So, I'm going to click right on here, and
| | 03:58 |
change it to 16.
And notice that it will move that level
| | 04:02 |
up.
Now, I want an additional level above the
| | 04:04 |
roof to mark where the parapet is going to be.
| | 04:07 |
And this level, I don't want any
associated floor plans.
| | 04:10 |
So, I'm going to click the Level button
one more time.
| | 04:13 |
And on the Options bar here, this check
box and button is why we got floor plans
| | 04:18 |
when we created level two.
If you click the Floor Plan Types, you
| | 04:22 |
could see that it's Ceiling Plan, Floor
Plan and Structural Plan.
| | 04:25 |
So, had I clicked first, I could've
removed Structural Plan before creating
| | 04:29 |
level two.
In this case, what I'm going to do is
| | 04:33 |
simply un-check the box and not create any
floor plans at all.
| | 04:37 |
I'm going to highlight over here above the
roof, and notice the small little blue
| | 04:42 |
dimension that appears on the left
hand-side, I want to make sure that says
| | 04:46 |
three feet and then I'll click.
Drag it across the other side here.
| | 04:52 |
When it's lined up, I'll click again,
click the Modify tool to cancel out of the
| | 04:56 |
command, and then I'm going to zoom in on
that location.
| | 05:01 |
Now, Revit will just name it Level thre,
so all I have to do is click on it,
| | 05:05 |
highlight the name, click again and type
in the name that I want it to have.
| | 05:13 |
And I'll go ahead and click in an empty
white space to deselect.
| | 05:17 |
Notice the color here, if it's black, it's
letting you know there are no floor plans.
| | 05:21 |
If it's blue, it's letting you know there
are floor plans.
| | 05:26 |
Now, those are the levels.
The next thing I want to do is add some
| | 05:29 |
grids.
So, you could add the grid right here in
| | 05:32 |
the elevation view as well, but I think
it's a little easier to add them in a
| | 05:34 |
floor plan.
So, I'm going to go back to level one
| | 05:37 |
floor plan.
And then here on the Datum panel, you'll
| | 05:40 |
see the Grid button is available.
I'll click that.
| | 05:44 |
And all I need to do is pick a point down
here somewhere, drag it straight up to
| | 05:48 |
about the length that I want, and click again.
| | 05:53 |
That creates the first grid.
I'll come up lined up with it at about 24
| | 05:59 |
feet away, click and click.
Keep it lined up to place the second grid.
| | 06:07 |
It didn't quite come in exactly 24 feet.
So, before I go further, I'll just change
| | 06:12 |
that number by clicking right on the text
and making it 24.
| | 06:17 |
Now, I'm going to roll in just slightly
with the wheel here.
| | 06:19 |
Notice, the first grid was number one, and
the second one automatically became two.
| | 06:24 |
Let's just keep going, and I'll do a
couple more, and I'm just going to keep
| | 06:28 |
these at 24 feet for right now.
You can make them any distance that your
| | 06:34 |
design requires.
And I'll do about five or six of these.
| | 06:40 |
Now, the next one I'm going to run
horizontally this way, and notice it goes
| | 06:44 |
to grid number seven.
Before you go to the next one, just click
| | 06:49 |
right on the number seven and change that
to big letter A and press Enter.
| | 06:55 |
And when you do, the next one will become
big letter B.
| | 07:00 |
I'm going to click on this dimension here,
make that 24 and then I'll do two more.
| | 07:08 |
And these are going to actually be at 28.
Now, I'm going to zoom out enough that I
| | 07:14 |
can see everything.
Cancel out of the command.
| | 07:17 |
So, I have lettered grids over here,
numbered grids over here.
| | 07:20 |
Notice these are too short, I want them to
intersect through this one.
| | 07:23 |
Click any gridline, it doesn't matter
which one.
| | 07:27 |
Notice this big open circle right here.
If I start dragging it, notice that Revit
| | 07:31 |
will not only move the one that I'm
dragging, but it will move all of them and
| | 07:35 |
keep them all connected together.
Finally, if we take a look back at our
| | 07:41 |
self-elevation, or really any of our elevations.
| | 07:44 |
And let's zoom out.
Notice that grids will appear in the
| | 07:47 |
elevation views as well as the plan.
So, this is why I said it really didn't
| | 07:51 |
matter if we created them in plan or
elevation, but I prefer to create them in
| | 07:54 |
plan.
So, the levels mark the actual floor
| | 07:57 |
locations, the finished floor locations in
your building.
| | 08:01 |
And the grids are going to be useful later
to help us lay out the geometry, such as
| | 08:05 |
the columns and so forth, and those two
things are common in most buildings.
| | 08:10 |
Most buildings have floor levels.
Most buildings have a column grid.
| | 08:13 |
So, it's a pretty good idea to get started
with those early in the project.
| | 08:17 |
Doesn't necessarily have to be the first
thing you do, but it's not a bad idea to
| | 08:20 |
get them in there early.
| | 08:22 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with walls| 00:00 |
In this movie, I would like to introduce
you to Walls.
| | 00:03 |
Walls are perhaps the most basic element
of any building so what makes sense for us
| | 00:05 |
to spend a little time here learning how
to use the wall tool.
| | 00:09 |
I made a file called Walls, and this is
just a saved version of the Column Grid
| | 00:12 |
layout that we created in the previous movie.
| | 00:16 |
We are going to look at laying of walls in
two ways in this movie.
| | 00:19 |
We are going to lay them up very precisely
relative to the column grid.
| | 00:22 |
And we're also going to lay them out in a
little bit more of a sketch fashion, just
| | 00:25 |
so you can compare and contrast the two techniques.
| | 00:28 |
Now, there's no one right or wrong to do
it, so you can certainly focus on the
| | 00:31 |
technique that works best for you.
So I'm currently in the Level 1 floor plan
| | 00:36 |
and the Wall tool is located here on the
Architecture tab.
| | 00:41 |
Now, you can just click the top half of
this button, but if you happen to click
| | 00:43 |
the bottom half and this fly-out opens up,
just make sure that you're choosing Wall
| | 00:47 |
Architectural.
When you do, there's lots of options that
| | 00:52 |
become available and we don't want to
necessarily get hung up on every single
| | 00:54 |
option, but there are a few that we
want to take a look at.
| | 00:58 |
The first is, right here on the Properties
palate there is a drop-down list at the
| | 01:02 |
top and this is probably the most
important setting, because you need to
| | 01:05 |
establish what kind of wall you're creating.
| | 01:09 |
Revit calls this a Type, so what type of
wall we want.
| | 01:12 |
Because that wall type actually will
configure several of the other settings
| | 01:15 |
for for you.
So if you change types, it might mess up
| | 01:18 |
all the other settings.
So always do the type first.
| | 01:22 |
And the type that I want to use in this
case is just a generic 12-inch wall.
| | 01:26 |
For the purposes of this model, we're just
going to stick with generic walls, which
| | 01:29 |
are just really basic walls.
If you want more detailed walls, you can
| | 01:32 |
look at some of the examples that we cover
in the Revit Essential Training here in
| | 01:35 |
the lynda.com library.
So I've got generic 12-inch wall, that's
| | 01:40 |
my basic wall.
And the next thing I want to consider is
| | 01:43 |
its height.
Now, notice that we're setting the height
| | 01:46 |
here, but next to that it says unconnected.
| | 01:48 |
If you click that drop down for unconnected.
| | 01:51 |
It turns out that there's a list of all
your floor levels there.
| | 01:54 |
Now, in the previous movie we laid out the
floor levels, and so here we can actually
| | 01:58 |
start to assign the height of the walls to
match one of the heights of those levels.
| | 02:03 |
So I wanted to match the height at the
parapet, so I'm going to choose that from
| | 02:07 |
the list.
The next thing I want to consider is the
| | 02:10 |
location line.
You can draw the walls from their center
| | 02:13 |
line or from their faces.
I'm going to draw the exterior walls
| | 02:16 |
first, and I think for the exterior walls,
it makes a certain amount of sense to use
| | 02:20 |
the finish face exterior.
That means whatever point I locate for
| | 02:24 |
that wall will stay put at the exterior
face of the wall.
| | 02:27 |
And then later, if we thicken the wall or
make it thinner, the exterior face will
| | 02:30 |
stay where it is and it will get thicker
or thinner relative to that.
| | 02:35 |
If I start clicking on screen right now,
it will draw directly relative to that
| | 02:39 |
finished face exterior.
Let me click a start point right here and
| | 02:43 |
then zoom in a little bit right where my
mouse is.
| | 02:47 |
And notice that we're drawing by that face
of the wall.
| | 02:50 |
Now, if I start this way, I'm drawing
somewhat randomly.
| | 02:53 |
So, what I'm going to do is press Escape
just one time.
| | 02:57 |
Make sure you do not press more than once.
If you press more than once, it will
| | 03:00 |
cancel you all the way out of the command,
you'll have to start all the settings over
| | 03:03 |
again.
But if you press just one time, it just
| | 03:06 |
cancels that current wall, but keeps me in
the Wall command.
| | 03:10 |
Notice that over here I have an Offset feature.
| | 03:14 |
Well with this feature, I can put in any
number I want, I'm going to put in 2 feet
| | 03:17 |
and press Enter.
Now, the way this works is wherever you
| | 03:22 |
click Now, your wall will actually draw
two feet away from that, and to be more
| | 03:26 |
precise, the finish face exterior of the
wall is two feet away from the points I
| | 03:31 |
click.
So let me escape again one time so I don't
| | 03:37 |
cancel all the way out of the command,
just the one time.
| | 03:41 |
And move your mouse here by the grid intersection.
| | 03:44 |
Now, if you're not sure which one you're
doing, you can zoom out a little bit.
| | 03:47 |
I want to be here on Grid Line 2 at the top.
| | 03:50 |
So the intersection between Grid Line 2
and column line A, I'm going to click
| | 03:54 |
right there.
And start to move my mouse.
| | 03:58 |
So now if you measured from Grid Line A to
the finished face exterior of that wall,
| | 04:02 |
that would be 2 feet.
That's where that 2 foot offset is.
| | 04:06 |
Now, if your wall is going down instead of
up, you can tap the space bar.
| | 04:10 |
Let me show you.
If I tap the space bar, it flips down.
| | 04:13 |
If I tap it again, it flips up.
So make sure it's going up or away from
| | 04:17 |
the grid, in other words.
I'm going to zoom or pan over to here, and
| | 04:23 |
snap to Grid Intersection A6.
Then I'm going to turn the corner, and let
| | 04:29 |
me zoom out again.
Come down here to D6, turn the corner
| | 04:34 |
again, and I'll come back here to Grid
Line 2.
| | 04:38 |
Press Escape one time.
And you can see that I've created three
| | 04:43 |
walls that are all offset exactly 2 feet
away from the intersections of those grid
| | 04:47 |
lines.
Now, I want to draw some of the interior
| | 04:51 |
walls.
So, I'm going to change types.
| | 04:53 |
So, make sure you're still in the Wall command.
| | 04:55 |
If you've canceled out just click the Wall
tool again in the Architecture tab.
| | 04:58 |
And I'm going to use the drop down here
and choose a thinner size.
| | 05:03 |
I'm going to choose generic 5 inch this time.
| | 05:06 |
That will reset many of the settings here.
So, I want to verify my settings.
| | 05:11 |
Instead of unconnected, this time I
want to go up to Level 2.
| | 05:16 |
So that's going to take this wall and it's
going to go just up to the second level.
| | 05:20 |
I'm going to leave the wall center line as
the location line this time, but over
| | 05:24 |
here, I want to set the offset back to 0.
So I'm going to put in 0, press enter, and
| | 05:31 |
then I'm going to come down here and
highlight the exterior wall at the bottom
| | 05:36 |
and Grid Line 4.
And you'll notice that Revit says I'm
| | 05:41 |
going to get an intersection right there.
And I'll click, pull this wall straight
| | 05:47 |
up.
You can go at any angle you want.
| | 05:49 |
But I want to make sure I'm going straight
up until it intersects the opposite wall
| | 05:52 |
and click again.
Now, if you zoom your mouse in on that
| | 05:56 |
location, you'll notice that Revit has
automatically cleaned up the intersection
| | 06:00 |
between those two walls.
So that's pretty nice.
| | 06:04 |
Now, I'm going to zoom back out.
Now, you don't have to draw your walls
| | 06:08 |
relative to the grid lines at all.
In fact, you can draw out the walls
| | 06:12 |
anywhere you like.
So for the next few walls, I'm just going
| | 06:15 |
to rough them in by eye.
And then later, we'll come back and move
| | 06:19 |
them around.
So I'm going to come over here just a
| | 06:22 |
little to the left of Column Line 5.
Click a point on the exterior wall.
| | 06:28 |
Pull it straight down.
The dimension will help me a little bit.
| | 06:31 |
I'll go about 18 feet, or so.
Pull it over to the right about 22 feet,
| | 06:36 |
or so.
And then come back up to the exterior
| | 06:39 |
wall.
Notice how I didn't get caught up on
| | 06:41 |
exactly how far I was going, I just did it rough.
| | 06:45 |
I'm eyeballing or I'm sketching right now,
and then later, I'll refine that sketch
| | 06:49 |
more precisely.
Let me divide this space in two by just
| | 06:53 |
clicking between those two walls.
Let's divide this space in two.
| | 06:59 |
By clicking between those two walls.
Over here, by Column Line B, we're going
| | 07:03 |
to enter the restaurant.
So, I'm going to create a little vestibule
| | 07:07 |
here just by creating a little L-shaped
wall configuration.
| | 07:11 |
This connection to the next wall Revit
calls Chain.
| | 07:14 |
And you can see that up on the options bar
because the chain check box is selected.
| | 07:20 |
To break the chain, press Escape once.
Again, one time is important.
| | 07:26 |
That will break the chain but keep me in
the Wall command, and then for my final
| | 07:30 |
wall, I'm going to come a little to the
right of Grid Line 5, kind of pull down
| | 07:34 |
here just above grid line c, and then I'll
go back and finish it over at Grid Line 4.
| | 07:42 |
And that's going to be kind of the back of
house area.
| | 07:45 |
I'm going to escape now, all the way out
of the command.
| | 07:47 |
Either 2 Escapes or click the Modify tool.
Either one will work.
| | 07:51 |
And, take a look at my final products here.
| | 07:53 |
Those are the basic walls that I need for
the layout of the restaurant.
| | 07:57 |
They're not terribly precise, yet.
But, one of the things that's very
| | 08:00 |
powerful about Revit, is if you later come
in and select one of these walls.
| | 08:05 |
And move it, notice that all the other,
walls will stay, connected, and associated
| | 08:09 |
with it.
So, in the next movie we're going to learn
| | 08:12 |
how to do those kind of movements very
precisely, so that we can control exactly
| | 08:16 |
the sizes of all those spaces.
But before we leave this file, lets just
| | 08:20 |
take a look at how this thing looks in 3D.
If you look up here on your Project
| | 08:25 |
browser, you'll notice that we've got a
floor plans category, a ceiling plans and
| | 08:29 |
elevations but, we don't have a 3D category.
| | 08:33 |
Up here on the toolbar, there's this small
little doghouse icon.
| | 08:37 |
It looks like a little birdhouse or a doghouse.
| | 08:39 |
If you click that, that's the default 3D view.
| | 08:43 |
Notice that it takes us to a 3D isometric,
and here on the project browser it created
| | 08:49 |
a new 3D views category and a new 3D view
called just 3D.
| | 08:55 |
If you want to get a better look at how
your model is shaping up here, hold your
| | 08:58 |
shift key down.
And drag your wheel.
| | 09:02 |
So you're holding in both the Shift key
and the wheel, and you can orbit and spin
| | 09:06 |
this model around.
And now, you could see very clearly that
| | 09:10 |
our three exterior walls go the full
height of the building, and all of our
| | 09:13 |
interior walls are set down at Level 2.
So there's plenty more for us to do.
| | 09:19 |
That's the basic process that's involved
in laying out some walls.
| | 09:23 |
You can either lay out the walls very
precisely relative to a column grid or
| | 09:27 |
some other geometry, or you can lay them
out in a very rough fashion and then come
| | 09:30 |
back and modify them later.
The choice is yours and it really depends
| | 09:35 |
on what you're trying to achieve.
| | 09:37 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Understanding dimensions| 00:00 |
In earliest schematic design phases, it's
okay to rough in the locations of walls
| | 00:03 |
and other geometry, where you think they
might go.
| | 00:06 |
But at some point you're going to want to
refine those layouts and make them a
| | 00:08 |
little bit more precise.
Now I'd rather do this primarily with
| | 00:12 |
dimensions, we have other ways, but
dimensions provide a really quick and easy
| | 00:15 |
way.
And move geometry around and so in this
| | 00:18 |
movie I'd like to show you two kinds of
dimensions temporary and permanent
| | 00:21 |
dimensions.
I have a file called dimensions and it's
| | 00:25 |
got a really rough wall layout here.
It's in the middle first of all.
| | 00:29 |
Now I'm going to select this wall here and
center this horizontal wall by clicking on
| | 00:34 |
it.
And what you see when I click on it is two
| | 00:38 |
dimensions one that goes to the exterior
wall down below, and another one that goes
| | 00:42 |
to the next nearest interior wall.
Now that's the first thing that you
| | 00:47 |
want to understand about temporary dimensions.
| | 00:49 |
Is Revit just sort of decides what nearby
geometry it thinks is the best reference.
| | 00:53 |
Let me deselect this wall, and the way you
deselect and object is to just click an
| | 00:57 |
empty white space.
And then I'm going to roll my wheel to
| | 01:00 |
zoom in a little bit.
Now, I'm going to zoom in far enough that
| | 01:03 |
I no longer see those two walls that it
was referencing a moment ago.
| | 01:07 |
And when I select the wall this time.
Notice that Revit chooses different
| | 01:11 |
reference points.
Which reference points to choose really
| | 01:14 |
depend on a variety of factors.
Not the least of which is what you're
| | 01:18 |
zoomed in on.
In this case, I actually know the distance
| | 01:20 |
that I want it to be off of this grid line.
| | 01:23 |
So, that was actually a quick and easy way
to establish that.
| | 01:27 |
So, with the wall still selected, all I
have to do to interact with this temporary
| | 01:30 |
dimensions is highlight the piece of text
right here and click it.
| | 01:34 |
Notice that will make the text editable,
and I can type in whatever number I want
| | 01:38 |
that value to actually be.
So, this in case I'm going to type 8 for 8
| | 01:42 |
feet.
And when I press Enter, that will actually
| | 01:46 |
move the wall in order to make this
dimension, eight feet.
| | 01:50 |
Now, let me change the selection.
I'm going to click an empty space to
| | 01:53 |
deselect, an I'm going to change the
selection to this wall instead.
| | 01:57 |
This time I get dimensions that reference
the two vertical walls.
| | 02:01 |
And notice it's ignoring the grid line in
this case.
| | 02:04 |
RevIt tends to favor the other walls over
the grid lines.
| | 02:07 |
But if you want to, you can force it to
use another reference point, like a grid
| | 02:11 |
line, easily enough.
How do you do that?
| | 02:14 |
Well, you see these small little dots that
appear on the dimensions.
| | 02:19 |
Those are witness line grips.
And you can take those Dot and you can
| | 02:23 |
drag them and I'm going to drag it until I
highlight this column grid line, grid line
| | 02:28 |
five, and then let go.
That will tell me that the current
| | 02:34 |
distance between that wall and that grid
line is two feet.
| | 02:37 |
So I'm going to click right in that
dimension and I'm going to change it to
| | 02:40 |
three foot four inches.
Now we've talked about how to input feet,
| | 02:43 |
you just type the number To input feet and
inches you need to either use the foot and
| | 02:47 |
inch symbols or you can use your space bar.
| | 02:50 |
Let me show you an example.
I'm going to do three space four.
| | 02:55 |
That's going to be three feet and four inches.
| | 02:58 |
So, the space separates the feet from the inches.
| | 03:00 |
When I press Enter, it will move the wall
to that new location.
| | 03:05 |
Let's continue with another example.
Let me scroll down to here.
| | 03:09 |
I want this wall to be 4 foot 8 inches
from this wall.
| | 03:13 |
So I'm going to select it.
And notice that again Revit is choosing
| | 03:18 |
different walls.
So I can repeat the same trick.
| | 03:21 |
Just drag this witness line.
Snap to that wall and then let's click in
| | 03:25 |
here and let's use an alternate method of
feet and inches.
| | 03:28 |
I can do 4 feet symbol which is just the
apostrophe mark Eight.
| | 03:35 |
And when I press Enter, that will be
interpreted as 4 feet, 8 inches.
| | 03:38 |
So there's a couple different ways you can
do that.
| | 03:41 |
And really, they both do the same thing,
so the choice is yours.
| | 03:44 |
Now, as you can see, I'm having to move a
lot of witness lines.
| | 03:47 |
So perhaps you might be looking for a way
to input these dimension values without
| | 03:50 |
having to move so many of the witness
lines manually.
| | 03:53 |
Well, you can set up dimensions ahead of
time that have the witness lines exactly
| | 03:57 |
where you want them to be and place those
dimensions and use those to modify.
| | 04:02 |
We call these permanent dimensions.
So let's take a look at those.
| | 04:05 |
Up here on the Quick Access toolbar is the
Aligned Dimension button, so I'm going to
| | 04:10 |
click that.
When the Dimension tool appears, I need to
| | 04:15 |
select at least two objects to be witness lines.
| | 04:19 |
So, I'm going to select this wall right
here and this wall right here.
| | 04:24 |
Now it's important that you don't click
again on the same locations because if you
| | 04:28 |
do, you'll just remove that witness line.
Make sure you only click each witness line
| | 04:34 |
one time.
The final click in placing a permanent
| | 04:37 |
dimension is you have to place an empty
white space.
| | 04:41 |
So I'm going to come down here, and I'm
going to click in the empty space to place
| | 04:44 |
that dimension where I want it to go.
Let me make another one.
| | 04:47 |
I'm going to go from this wall here to
this column grid right there.
| | 04:51 |
And click an empty white space to place it.
| | 04:54 |
Now I'm going to get out of that command
with the Modify tool.
| | 04:59 |
And notice that these dimensions are left
behind, as actual objects on the screen.
| | 05:03 |
You could certainly use permanent
dimensions when you actually want to
| | 05:06 |
report how big something is.
And print it out that way.
| | 05:10 |
But the other way that we can use these
permanent dimensions is to help us control
| | 05:13 |
the temporary dimension behavior.
Now, what you don't want to do is select
| | 05:18 |
the dimension and go right to the text.
Notice that that brings up the dimension
| | 05:22 |
text dialogue.
That's not what we want here.
| | 05:25 |
I'm going to cancel that, you still
want to make sure that you select the
| | 05:28 |
object that you want to move.
I still want to make sure that I select
| | 05:32 |
this wall.
And then notice how that lit up that
| | 05:35 |
dimension text?
Watch it again.
| | 05:36 |
I'm going to deselect, I'm going to select
this wall, and watch the text of that
| | 05:39 |
dimension.
You see how it changes color and it kind
| | 05:42 |
of lights up?
Now I could modify that value and make it
| | 05:45 |
9 feet.
Let's do it again with this one, I'm
| | 05:48 |
going to select this wall.
Notice how that dimension lights up.
| | 05:51 |
I'm going to click in there, and I'm
going to change that to two feet.
| | 05:55 |
So, the permanent dimensions give you even
a little bit more control, because you can
| | 05:58 |
place the dimensions in exact, precise
locations where you want them to go, and
| | 06:02 |
then use them as temporaries to move your
geometry around.
| | 06:06 |
So let's look at another example.
Up here, I want to configure these two
| | 06:10 |
toilet rooms in this storage room area.
And I want to do all that very precisely.
| | 06:14 |
So I'm going to go back to the permanent
dimension tool, and notice the default
| | 06:18 |
behavior that we're getting here is that
Revit is highlighting the centerlines of
| | 06:22 |
the walls, right?
We get the center line here.
| | 06:25 |
We get the center line here.
Now, it is possible to move your mouse to
| | 06:27 |
the face of that wall, and press the Tab key.
| | 06:30 |
When you press the Tab key, grab it will
change selection.
| | 06:35 |
It'll cycle through the available options.
If you press Tab again, it'll go back to
| | 06:39 |
center, but each time I press Tab, it'll
cycle through the different options.
| | 06:42 |
I'm going to click to get the face of that wall.
| | 06:44 |
It's actually not necessary to keep
tabbing each time.
| | 06:48 |
You could if you wanted to, but if you
look over here on the Options bar, there's
| | 06:52 |
a drop down here and we can change the
focus of this dimension to select the
| | 06:56 |
faces of these walls instead of the centers.
| | 07:03 |
Now, notice that I've just placed several
witness lines in the same string of
| | 07:07 |
dimensions.
But remember, to complete the dimension,
| | 07:11 |
to finish it, you have to click an empty
white space.
| | 07:15 |
Don't click again in one of the witness
lines' locations, because if you do,
| | 07:18 |
you're going to just be stuck in that command.
| | 07:21 |
Alright, let's do one more dimension here.
To here and place it out here.
| | 07:26 |
Let me cancel out of the command with the
modify tool and let's clean all this up.
| | 07:30 |
For this location right here, I want this
distance to be 15 foot eight.
| | 07:37 |
I'm going to change selections to this wall.
| | 07:40 |
For this distance right here, I want to
clear five feet.
| | 07:43 |
So I'm going to click in that dimension,
and put in five, and press Enter.
| | 07:47 |
And then, for this location here, I want
the size of this restroom to be nine foot
| | 07:52 |
ten.
I'm going to do 9 space, 10, and that
| | 07:56 |
sizes all of those.
Now I could add a new dimension to move
| | 08:00 |
this wall.
I want it right in the middle to divide
| | 08:03 |
this space equally, but let's look at
another option.
| | 08:07 |
I'm going to simply select the wall.
You don't have to do all the movements
| | 08:10 |
with temporary dimensions, you could do
the math here and try and figure it out,
| | 08:12 |
but I don't want to do that.
Instead, notice that when I select an
| | 08:16 |
object, Revit takes me to the modify tab.
On the modify tab, there's a bank of
| | 08:21 |
modify tools.
Among those modify tools, we find the Move
| | 08:24 |
command, so I'm going to click that.
And Revit is very good at finding Key
| | 08:29 |
reference points.
We call these snap points.
| | 08:32 |
For the start point of my move, I want the
end point of this wall, that's a snap
| | 08:36 |
point.
And for the end point of this move, I
| | 08:39 |
want to move up slightly, until it gives
me a little triangle shape and says the
| | 08:43 |
word Midpoint.
And then I want to click again and that's
| | 08:48 |
going to snap exactly to the mid point in
that location.
| | 08:51 |
Let's look at another quick example,
another way you can use the move tool is
| | 08:55 |
to select your object go to move and I am
going to pick any base point this time
| | 08:59 |
somewhere on the wall, I cam going to
start moving to the left.
| | 09:04 |
When you move, it doesn't matter how far I move.
| | 09:06 |
Notice there's a dimension there, and that
dimension is lit up in a blue color kind
| | 09:10 |
of like a temporary dimension.
Revit calls this a listening dimension.
| | 09:15 |
And if you start to type, your value will
go right into that dimension.
| | 09:20 |
So in this case, I want to just make sure
that I'm going exactly horizontal.
| | 09:24 |
It doesn't matter how far, Type 1 and
press Enter.
| | 09:27 |
And notice the result was, that that wall
moved exactly one foot to the left.
| | 09:32 |
So there's a few different ways that you
can move things around to fine-tune your
| | 09:36 |
layout and make things more precise.
You can use permanent dimensions, you can
| | 09:40 |
use temporary dimensions or you can use
the Move command.
| | 09:44 |
The basic process: you lay things out
close to what you want them to be, and
| | 09:47 |
then you come back and refine them with
these various tools.
| | 09:51 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding doors and windows| 00:00 |
So now that you have the wall layout
relatively fleshed out, it's time for some
| | 00:02 |
doors and windows.
So to add doors and windows, I'm in a file
| | 00:06 |
called doors and windows, and we're zoomed
in here on the upper portion of the floor
| | 00:10 |
plan.
And over here on the architecture tab, we
| | 00:15 |
have a door icon and a window icon.
So I'm going to click the door icon I'm
| | 00:19 |
not going to really change any of the
settings, but let me just point out a few
| | 00:23 |
of them to you.
Here on the properties pallet, we have a
| | 00:27 |
drop down, like we did with walls and that
gives us some different sized doors, so we
| | 00:31 |
have one kind of door, revet calls that a
family, so we have one door.
| | 00:36 |
Family a single flush and that door family
has several types they're called.
| | 00:41 |
The types of the different sizes.
Now the default size is 36 by 84, and that
| | 00:45 |
works fine for me for this.
So I'm not going to actually change that.
| | 00:49 |
The default sill height is at zero.
That makes sense too, because you
| | 00:52 |
typically want the door to be right down
at the floor.
| | 00:54 |
So we're not going to raise it up or lower
it down.
| | 00:56 |
So I don't need to change that.
So I'm pretty good with any of the default
| | 01:00 |
settings.
The only thing I need to do is place the
| | 01:03 |
door.
Now, you'll notice that if my mouse is in
| | 01:05 |
the middle of the screen somewhere, I get
this little circle with a line through it.
| | 01:10 |
Basically Revit's telling me, sorry I
can't put a door there.
| | 01:13 |
Well, we get a little bit of a clue down
in the status bar of what's going on.
| | 01:17 |
The message says, click on a wall to place
the door so before you put your mouse over
| | 01:21 |
a wall, your not eligible to place if I
tried to click I won't get anything
| | 01:25 |
happening but as soon as I move my mouse
over a wall your going to see the door
| | 01:30 |
appear.
Now, Revit has a name for this too.
| | 01:36 |
A door is considered a hosted element.
And so, it requires a wall host before it
| | 01:42 |
can be placed.
So all your job is, is to highlight and
| | 01:45 |
then click on the appropriate host.
So let's say that I wanted a door here,
| | 01:50 |
between column lines 4 and 5.
All I need to do is find the location I
| | 01:53 |
want.
And then click to place the door.
| | 01:57 |
Now, we discussed temporary dimensions in
a previous movie.
| | 02:00 |
Notice that the temporary dimensions
remain on screen after you place the door.
| | 02:05 |
Now, Revit did a nice job of centering
that door directly between the two walls.
| | 02:11 |
Maybe you want that door to be positioned
a little bit differently.
| | 02:14 |
Perhaps I wanted it to be instead of 11
foot 10 here, maybe I only wanted it to be
| | 02:18 |
10 feet off of that other wall.
You can interact with those temporary
| | 02:23 |
dimensions with doors and windows the same
way you could with walls.
| | 02:27 |
So I can just simply type in 10 and press
Enter and the door will move.
| | 02:31 |
Maybe the door's not swinging in the right direction.
| | 02:34 |
Currently it's swinging off to the right,
maybe I want to it to the left.
| | 02:38 |
You'll notice these little grips on the door.
| | 02:40 |
If you click those, it will change the
swing of the door.
| | 02:43 |
In fact, we could even swing it into the
building or out of the building, you can
| | 02:46 |
change the direction any way you like.
Now, recall the message down at the bottom
| | 02:51 |
of the screen.
It said click on a wall to place the door,
| | 02:54 |
and then in parentheses it said space bar
to flip the instance.
| | 02:58 |
So let me show you an example of that.
I'm going to move over here to this toilet
| | 03:02 |
room.
And notice that the door when I have it
| | 03:05 |
swinging into the room, it's flipping the
wrong way.
| | 03:08 |
Now, I could click and place it, and then
use those little grips I just showed you
| | 03:12 |
to flip it, or you can tap your space bar
and flip it before you place it.
| | 03:18 |
So, either one is fine.
It's entirely up to you.
| | 03:20 |
Let's move over to this one.
So now, watch.
| | 03:23 |
If I subtly move left or right, it flips
in the room or out of the room, tap the
| | 03:27 |
space bar to change the direction.
If you just kind of keep your thumb on the
| | 03:32 |
Spacebar and move your mouse around on the
screen, it becomes very quick and easy for
| | 03:35 |
you to place a variety of doors.
And so I'm just going to make sure that I
| | 03:40 |
have a door going into each of these
rooms, and again, keep in mind that if
| | 03:43 |
you're not quite satisfied with the
location, you can always come in And
| | 03:45 |
modify the dimension.
Now, once you have those basics down, you
| | 03:50 |
know everything you need to know to place windows.
| | 03:53 |
It works exactly the same way.
So, let's cancel out of this command with
| | 03:57 |
the modify tool.
On the architecture tab let's click the
| | 04:00 |
window button.
Here it is on the properties palette.
| | 04:04 |
The family is fixed.
The types are these sizes.
| | 04:08 |
The default size is at 36 by 48, in this
case I'm going to change that to the
| | 04:13 |
larger one, a 36 by 72.
The default sill height for that window is
| | 04:19 |
1 foot off the floor.
I'm going to raise that up to 2 feet off
| | 04:23 |
the floor.
So you can make any of these changes you
| | 04:26 |
want and then I'm going to come in here,
highlight a wall.
| | 04:30 |
It works the same way, you can't place it
out in empty space but you can highlight a
| | 04:33 |
wall and click to place the window.
I'm going to pan up slightly and place
| | 04:38 |
another one and another one and another
one and so on.
| | 04:42 |
If you want to, you can keep placing them
this way or after you've placed a few, you
| | 04:46 |
can escape out of the command, I'm
going to double escape to get all the way
| | 04:50 |
out.
I can select this window and maybe I want
| | 04:54 |
to put a little space here between it.
So I'm going to do about 6 feet.
| | 04:59 |
Now, let me zoom in slightly here and
let's say that I liked having two windows
| | 05:03 |
and then a space, and then two more windows.
| | 05:06 |
So I want another window the same distance
as this one.
| | 05:10 |
I'm going to select this window right here.
| | 05:12 |
Now, like we saw in the dimensions movie,
when you select an object, Revit takes you
| | 05:17 |
to the Modify tab.
On the Modify tab, we have a series of
| | 05:21 |
modify tools.
We looked at the movie tool in that movie,
| | 05:24 |
but let's look at the copy tool in this movie.
| | 05:27 |
The copy tool works exactly the same way
as move.
| | 05:30 |
I'm going to click it.
You still need to indicate a base point,
| | 05:33 |
and then a new point for the copy.
Well, in this case, I want this distance
| | 05:37 |
to be the same when I copy it over here.
So I'm going to choose the center line of
| | 05:42 |
the nearby window as the base point.
And think of it as picking this window up
| | 05:48 |
on a fishing pole.
And then walking with the fishing pole.
| | 05:51 |
So I'm carrying the window over here.
And then I'm going to snap right to the
| | 05:56 |
midpoint of that window, and do you see
how it maintains exactly the same spacing?
| | 06:01 |
Sometimes, you can get just one or two in
place where you want them, and then use
| | 06:05 |
tools like Copy to quickly replicate them
without having to do a lot of extra work.
| | 06:11 |
So either method is perfectly valid.
You can use whichever one you prefer.
| | 06:14 |
But, before we leave this file, let's take
a look at how things are shaping up in 3D.
| | 06:18 |
So, you may recall that to get to a 3D
view we can use this little icon right
| | 06:22 |
here on the tool bar.
This one that looks like a little
| | 06:26 |
birdhouse.
And I'll just click that and that will
| | 06:28 |
open up the default 3D view.
And again recall that the default 3D view
| | 06:32 |
is just right here on the project browser
so that's another way that we can get to
| | 06:35 |
it.
And also you may recall that if we hold
| | 06:38 |
down the Shift key and drag with the wheel
that we can spin this thing around and
| | 06:42 |
zooming and panning works here as well.
So if you want to get a closer look, you
| | 06:48 |
can just roll your wheel to zoom in and
see how things are shaping up.
| | 06:53 |
So for this example, we used the default
door and window families that are included
| | 06:57 |
in the template we started.
There are many many more interesting door
| | 07:00 |
and window families available.
In the next movie, we're going to look at
| | 07:04 |
how to load families, and we can load any
kind of family including doors and windows
| | 07:07 |
using the techniques we'll learn there.
| | 07:09 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Loading families| 00:00 |
Walls, doors, and windows are certainly
your most basic building blocks and they
| | 00:03 |
certainly start to make a layout come together.
| | 00:06 |
But there's many other objects that we
need to add to our building models in
| | 00:08 |
order to complete them.
It might be plumbing fixtures.
| | 00:12 |
It might be furniture and equipment.
Other kinds of doors and windows, columns,
| | 00:15 |
you name it.
All of these things are possible in Revit.
| | 00:18 |
And some of them have their own dedicated
tools, and some of them don't.
| | 00:20 |
But what they all have in common.
Is that each of these elements that we can
| | 00:24 |
add to our model are called Families in
the Revit environment.
| | 00:28 |
So, everything is a family.
And a family is just an, a discreet item
| | 00:31 |
that you can place in a model.
And we have lots of different kinds of
| | 00:34 |
families.
If the object that you want to place
| | 00:37 |
doesn't have it's own dedicated command.
In the previous movie, we added doors and
| | 00:41 |
windows.
And they each had their own tool but
| | 00:43 |
furniture and equipment and plumbing fixtures.
| | 00:46 |
They don't all have their own tool.
What we use instead is this Component
| | 00:49 |
tool.
So, a very generic way to refer to just
| | 00:51 |
any kind of family is to just simply say
you're going to place a component in your
| | 00:55 |
model.
Let's start with that.
| | 00:57 |
I'm going to click the component tool.
And here on the list you'll see the
| | 01:01 |
components that are already pre-loaded in
my project.
| | 01:06 |
Now, my toilet room areas need some
plumbing fixtures, so why don't we start
| | 01:09 |
with that.
So I'm going to come over here and zoom in
| | 01:12 |
on the toilet room areas here just rolling
the wheel and I've got this single sink
| | 01:17 |
here in my model.
Now, it's a sink kitchen so it's a kitchen
| | 01:21 |
sink, but for the time being at the stage
I'm at in this project, I'm really more
| | 01:25 |
interested in just a sink symbol.
And we can swap out a more specific one
| | 01:30 |
later when we've chosen the actual unit
that we're going to specify.
| | 01:34 |
So for now I'm just going to use this
default one.
| | 01:37 |
And bring it into these toilet rooms.
Now, you can see it's pointing the wrong
| | 01:41 |
way.
Like we've seen with other objects, if you
| | 01:43 |
tap the space bar, it will actually change
the orientation.
| | 01:47 |
So we can rotate in 90 degree implements
by just simply tapping space.
| | 01:50 |
So I'm going to place one of those sinks
right about here.
| | 01:55 |
And another one right about there.
Open up the list again, and choose a
| | 02:00 |
toilet this time.
Now, this one you'll notice will not place
| | 02:05 |
free-standing, so this toilet is actually
fairly similar to the doors and windows
| | 02:09 |
that we saw in the previous movie.
The symbol will not appear until I
| | 02:15 |
highlight an eligible host.
Which is what I'm going to do right there.
| | 02:19 |
So I'll go ahead and place that in.
And I'll place another one right here.
| | 02:22 |
Now let me stop there for a moment.
Let's click cancel.
| | 02:25 |
Because these things are placed kind of randomly.
| | 02:27 |
And just like we saw with other objects,
when you select them, you're going to see
| | 02:30 |
temporary dimensions appear on your screen.
| | 02:34 |
Now, we talked about these little witness
scripts in a previous movie.
| | 02:38 |
Let's talk about them again here.
I want to measure this toilet one foot six
| | 02:42 |
off the face of that wall not the center
of the wall.
| | 02:45 |
So you can drag this little dot like we
did in the previous movie but you could
| | 02:49 |
also just click it.
When you click it, it will actually jump
| | 02:52 |
to the phases and then back to the center,
each time you click, it they will cycle to
| | 02:57 |
a new location.
Let me change this dimension to 1 foot 6,
| | 03:01 |
we do the same thing over here click it.
See how it went to the outside?
| | 03:06 |
I will click it again it goes to the
inside, 1 foot 6.
| | 03:10 |
And now, those toilets are placed in the
correct location.
| | 03:13 |
We could do the same thing with the sinks,
let's zoom out a little bit.
| | 03:18 |
We do have a dedicated Column tool.
You have structural and architectural, but
| | 03:22 |
for this example, I'm just going to stick
with the architectural.
| | 03:25 |
And the default is a square column, which
might work well in these locations, and
| | 03:28 |
you'll see that the column does a really
nice job of kind of merging into the
| | 03:32 |
surrounding geometry.
But if you want a different shape column,
| | 03:36 |
what you'll see is.
There isn't another shape here on the
| | 03:40 |
list.
So in that case, what we need to do is
| | 03:42 |
load a Family.
The process we're going to use to load
| | 03:45 |
families is going to be similar regardless
of the kind of family.
| | 03:49 |
So let's look at it here for our column
first and then we can repeat it for some
| | 03:53 |
other types of objects.
Most of these elements that are eligible
| | 03:57 |
for Load Family will have their own
dedicated Load Family button right here on
| | 04:01 |
the ribbon.
So all you have to do is click that.
| | 04:05 |
And that will take you out to a browse
window, and it will go to whatever library
| | 04:09 |
is loaded as the default for your system.
In my case, that's the US Imperial
| | 04:13 |
Library.
I'm going to go to the columns folder
| | 04:16 |
here.
Double-click that, and I'm going to select
| | 04:19 |
this metal-clad column right here.
It's a slightly more interesting round
| | 04:23 |
shaped column.
I'll click Open.
| | 04:27 |
And now, you can see that I get that
slightly more decorative column.
| | 04:33 |
And I'll place that in a few locations
here in my plan.
| | 04:40 |
Now, that same basic process could work
for any kind of family.
| | 04:45 |
Let's say that we wanted to start putting
some tables here in our restaurant space.
| | 04:50 |
Well, we can load a furniture family.
Now, there isn't a furniture button here.
| | 04:55 |
We would go to the Component button, and
just like we just did for column, we would
| | 04:59 |
come over here to Load Family,
double-click the Furniture folder.
| | 05:05 |
Now, this folder is subdivided into
subfolders, so I'm going to go to the
| | 05:09 |
Tables folder.
And I'm actually going to bring in two
| | 05:13 |
different tables this time.
This one here is a round table that
| | 05:17 |
includes the chairs, and I'm also going to
bring in this rectangular table.
| | 05:23 |
So, if I select it, you could see what it
looks like.
| | 05:26 |
If I want to select both, I can hold the
Ctrl key down and click on both of them.
| | 05:30 |
So they're both highlighted I'll click
Open, and now you'll see that there's the
| | 05:35 |
rectangular table.
I've got a 72 by 30 inch size.
| | 05:40 |
There's other sizes.
Here's the round table.
| | 05:42 |
So over here we're going to do some booths.
| | 05:44 |
We'll do the rectangular table in that location.
| | 05:48 |
An then over here, we might want to do,
some tables with four chairs.
| | 05:54 |
Or some tables with six chairs.
And I'm just placing one of each.
| | 05:59 |
Because once we've got one of each placed,
we can then go and use the copy command to
| | 06:04 |
make multiple copies.
So, to remind you how that works, I'll
| | 06:08 |
simply select my table with four chairs.
That will take me to the Modify tab.
| | 06:13 |
Here's my Copy button.
And before I start to click my points this
| | 06:17 |
time, I'm going to check this box right
there, which is multiple copy.
| | 06:21 |
Now, I can pick my base point, and then
place a new one, and a new one, and a new
| | 06:25 |
one, and so on.
And if you want to do that a little bit
| | 06:29 |
more precisely, just make sure that when
you pick your new point, type in
| | 06:33 |
something.
So I can type in 8 feet and now, those
| | 06:36 |
copies are exactly 8 feet apart.
You can place the by eye or you can do
| | 06:41 |
them precisely.
So let's bring in one more family.
| | 06:44 |
Now, this family is actually a custom
family that I built.
| | 06:46 |
So despite the fact that you have lots of
resources available to you in that
| | 06:50 |
specific folder.
There's going to come a time when that
| | 06:53 |
specific folder is not going to be there.
You can search online or you can even
| | 06:57 |
build it yourself and that's what I've
done in this case so I'm going to go to
| | 07:00 |
the component tool, click Load Family.
So in the Exercise Files folder, I have
| | 07:08 |
this Booth Seating family.
I'm going to open that up.
| | 07:12 |
And you can that it comes in different
sizes, so we can do a short one or a long
| | 07:16 |
one.
I'm going to try and match the length of
| | 07:19 |
that table that I have right here.
Do a 60-inch size, apparently, I need a
| | 07:23 |
slightly smaller table.
I'll fix that later, and there it is.
| | 07:29 |
Now, I want one on the other side of that table.
| | 07:31 |
I can select it and use this command right
here, Mirror Pick Axis.
| | 07:35 |
Now, what's really neat about most
families is most of them have a
| | 07:39 |
centerline.
So I can very easily highlight the
| | 07:42 |
centerline of this table.
And I can mirror it to the other side.
| | 07:46 |
Once you have that, you can actually
select all three of these, and start to
| | 07:49 |
copy them.
Now, a fast way to select all three is to
| | 07:52 |
click next to them.
Hold your mouse down, and drag with this
| | 07:57 |
dashed line box.
And you see that box.
| | 08:01 |
Anything that box touches will be selected.
| | 08:04 |
And I can select all three of those items.
An then go to Copy, an make my multiple
| | 08:08 |
copies.
Now, if you want to learn how to build
| | 08:11 |
your own custom families, we have
resources for that here at lynda.com.
| | 08:15 |
We talk about it a little bit in the
essential training course, an then we have
| | 08:17 |
an entire course devoted to the family
editor that you can check out as well.
| | 08:22 |
Let's take a look at how things are
shaping up in 3D.
| | 08:24 |
Let's click our default 3D View icon and
you can kind of see a little peek of the
| | 08:28 |
table there through the window.
But why don't we hold down the Shift key
| | 08:33 |
and drag with the wheel.
To kind of tip the model down so that we
| | 08:39 |
can look inside.
So there's our decorative column, here's
| | 08:43 |
our table and chairs, and here's our two
booths with their table.
| | 08:46 |
You can continue copying and adding
additional components to begin flushing
| | 08:50 |
out the layout here.
So using the same process, you can load in
| | 08:54 |
additional families, including doors and
windows, and refine the layout of your
| | 08:57 |
building.
| | 08:59 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring additional modeling tools| 00:00 |
Getting up and running with Revit involves
a lot more than modelling.
| | 00:03 |
But before we leave the topic of modelling
behind, I'd like to look at several other
| | 00:07 |
modelling tools and techniques that you
might want to be aware of.
| | 00:10 |
Now, our goal here isn't to go into great
detail on any one of these tools.
| | 00:14 |
We've got Revit essential training here at
lynda.com to help you along with that.
| | 00:18 |
What we're going to do rather is just look
at sort of the highlights of some of the
| | 00:20 |
other parts and pieces that are/ likely be
a part of many of the building models that
| | 00:23 |
you're going to work with in really.
So, I'm in a file here called Modeling
| | 00:28 |
Tools and we're looking at a slightly more
refined version of our restaurant building
| | 00:33 |
and as you can see it's got some Glazing
on the exterior walls here, it's got a
| | 00:36 |
roof structure already, so let's take a
look at some of these features.
| | 00:43 |
Now most buildings have roofs, so why
don't we start there.
| | 00:47 |
Okay, there's a roof object right here,
and then another one over here.
| | 00:51 |
And the most obvious thing about the roof
that you can is it's easy to make a
| | 00:55 |
sloping roof.
Now a roof in Revit is what we call a
| | 00:59 |
sketch-based object.
Now if I select the roof, like most things
| | 01:03 |
Revit, if you select Then they become
semi-transparent while they're selected.
| | 01:07 |
So we can actually see right through the
roof now into the building there.
| | 01:10 |
But what the roof selected, if you look
over here we get some information for
| | 01:14 |
example, about it's slope.
So this roof's slope is currently four and
| | 01:19 |
twelve.
So it rises four inches for every twelve
| | 01:21 |
inches it runs.
Now, I could actually change that right
| | 01:25 |
here and make it steeper, and you'll see
that the walls adjust accordingly.
| | 01:31 |
Or I could make it shallower, and the
walls continue to adjust accordingly.
| | 01:35 |
Of course, right there that's probably a
little too shallow.
| | 01:38 |
Why don't we go back to 4 and 12.
Let me show you really quickly how that
| | 01:42 |
roof was created.
Let's say that we wanted to have a little
| | 01:45 |
canopy over the front door over here.
So, to do that, I'm going to go into level
| | 01:49 |
1 floor plan.
And I'll zoom in on the front door area,
| | 01:53 |
and we will build a really simple little
roof right there.
| | 01:58 |
So I'm going to click on the Roof button.
Now, it's roof by footprint that we're
| | 02:01 |
after, so if you click the drop-down
portion, just make sure you're choosing
| | 02:04 |
that roof By footprint.
Now that grays out the drawing and puts me
| | 02:08 |
in a sketching mode.
And if you look over here on the ribbon we
| | 02:11 |
have a variety of tools that we can choose from.
| | 02:14 |
I'm just going to choose this simple
rectangle option right there.
| | 02:19 |
And I'm going to click and draw a simple rectangle.
| | 02:25 |
I use the temporary dimensions as a guide.
And, I'm not too concerned with the depth
| | 02:29 |
here 9.6 is fine.
But, I want it about 10 feet wide.
| | 02:34 |
And, to make it sloped.
If I finished right now, I would have a
| | 02:37 |
perfectly flat roof.
To make it sloped, what you do is you
| | 02:41 |
click your modify tool to cancel out of
the command, and then I want to select
| | 02:45 |
both this line and this line.
And make those sloping edges.
| | 02:50 |
Now, the way I'm going to do that, is I'm
going to click here, and drag so that it
| | 02:53 |
highlights both of those edges.
Okay, so you want to make sure that you're
| | 02:58 |
dragging to the left.
If you drag to the right, it doesn't
| | 03:01 |
highlight those 2 edges.
But, if you drag to the left, it does.
| | 03:05 |
I've got those two selected.
And what you do is, up here on the Options
| | 03:09 |
bar, you check this little check box right
here, to make those two edges define
| | 03:13 |
slope.
Then over here, on the Properties palette,
| | 03:18 |
you can see that the slope is about 7 in 12.
| | 03:21 |
So that's awfully steep for this little
roof canopy, here, so I'm going to drop
| | 03:25 |
that down to maybe 4 in 12 to match the
roof that we have (no period) On the main
| | 03:29 |
building.
So, you just type four and press Enter and
| | 03:33 |
it will interpret it as four and twelve.
The way that you know that these are
| | 03:36 |
sloping edges is they have these little
triangles on them and when I click finish
| | 03:40 |
here, this big green check box that will
complete the roof and if we return to 3D
| | 03:44 |
you'll see that little roof right there.
The only trouble is that I accidentally
| | 03:50 |
built it on the floor.
Not that big of a deal.
| | 03:53 |
You see the base level says level one.
I'll just come over here and move that up
| | 03:57 |
to level two.
And that puts it up where it belongs.
| | 04:00 |
So that's a really simple example of
creating a roof.
| | 04:05 |
Another item that you see here is these
curtain wall items here.
| | 04:09 |
Now if I move my mouse around, you see
that there's a lot going on.
| | 04:12 |
You can see it's highlighting edges and
internal components and so forth.
| | 04:16 |
So what I'm looking for here, if I move my
mouse around.
| | 04:19 |
Is the dashed outer edge right there.
Now if you're having trouble getting it to
| | 04:24 |
highlight that dashed outer edge, you can
press the Tab key.
| | 04:27 |
And each time you tab, it will cycle
through different options and you can see
| | 04:30 |
there were several there.
So there's the dashed edge, but each time
| | 04:34 |
I tab you can see lots of other choices.
That's called a curtain wall.
| | 04:38 |
Now a curtain wall is just a more complex
wall that's divided into parts and pieces.
| | 04:43 |
It is actually a wall.
So let me take you to level one floor
| | 04:46 |
plan.
I'm going to open up level one floor plan
| | 04:48 |
here in the project browser, and right
here in this vestibule area we have two
| | 04:52 |
solid walls right here that we drew in a
previous movie.
| | 04:57 |
I'm going to select those two using that
same crossing window method that we did
| | 05:00 |
outside.
So, again, you click an empty space, and
| | 05:03 |
drag to the left.
Now, don't go too far, because you'll get
| | 05:06 |
the column grid.
I want to just touch those two walls,
| | 05:10 |
right there.
Now over here, it should say walls, and in
| | 05:13 |
parentheses, two.
And that's how you know that you've got
| | 05:16 |
just two walls selected.
I'm going to click this drop down, now
| | 05:19 |
currently it's a generic five inch wall
but if you scroll down toward the bottom
| | 05:22 |
of the list notice that there's a curtain
wall family and there's three different
| | 05:25 |
kinds of curtain walls and I'm going to
choose storefront.
| | 05:31 |
And that is how those walls on the
outside, or those curtain walls on the
| | 05:35 |
outside, were created.
They are just curtain walls called
| | 05:38 |
storefront.
And you can draw them just like you draw
| | 05:41 |
any other wall.
So let me show you over here, let's say
| | 05:44 |
that we wanted another one of.
These curtain walls embedded in this wall.
| | 05:49 |
Another really nice feature about the
curtain wall is if you draw it right on
| | 05:53 |
top of another wall it'll actually cut
itself right in there like a window would.
| | 05:58 |
So, I'm going to click the wall command,
open up the drop down.
| | 06:02 |
I'll choose that same curtain wall store front.
| | 06:07 |
And then I'll just pick two points
directly on top of this existing wall, and
| | 06:12 |
you'll see it will cut right in there.
Now, you may notice that it's oriented the
| | 06:17 |
opposite way of the one next to it, this
little grip right here will take care of
| | 06:19 |
that.
And all I have to do is flip it.
| | 06:23 |
If I go back outside to the 3D view, You
can see I now have this store front right
| | 06:27 |
in here.
I'm going to cancel out of there.
| | 06:30 |
Notice this one starts a little bit off
the floor.
| | 06:33 |
To do that you just simply click it and
right here you type in a value for the
| | 06:37 |
Base Offset from level and it will raise
that up.
| | 06:42 |
So that's how those curtain wall objects
were created.
| | 06:45 |
And there's lots of other elements in here.
| | 06:46 |
And you can feel free to look around and
explore but let me just point out one more
| | 06:49 |
to you that you might want to look at.
If I go back to level one floor plan, we
| | 06:54 |
have a balcony actually going up on level two.
| | 06:58 |
And here's a stairwell that goes up to
that balcony.
| | 07:02 |
So Revit has stair tools right here that
you can create a stair with complete with
| | 07:05 |
railings.
If I go up to level two floor plan,
| | 07:09 |
there's a floor object out here to make
that balcony now the floor object here is
| | 07:13 |
almost identical to the roof object that
we just looked at the only difference is
| | 07:18 |
none of the edges of this floor are sloped.
| | 07:25 |
So that keeps the floor slab perfectly
flat, where the roof that we built we made
| | 07:29 |
some of those edges slope.
But if I chose this edit boundary command,
| | 07:33 |
you'll see that its the same basic idea
that we saw with the roof object.
| | 07:38 |
So there is a lot of other model objects,
we got floors, we got roofs, we got
| | 07:41 |
stairs, we got curtain walls.
There's a variety of tools that we can use
| | 07:46 |
to begin to flush out our models and make
them more complete.
| | 07:50 |
So I encourage you to spend a little time
playing around with them and exploring in
| | 07:53 |
this model.
And if you want to learn more about the
| | 07:56 |
specifics of any of these tools you can
check out Revit Essential Training here at
| | 07:59 |
lynda.com
| | 08:01 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Working with ViewsCreating a section| 00:00 |
Most of the default templates that come
with Revit include some standard floor
| | 00:03 |
plans an elevations to get us started, but
none of them include any sections.
| | 00:08 |
And sections are actually one of my
favorite kinds of views that we can create
| | 00:11 |
in Revit.
Sections are real easy to create, they're
| | 00:14 |
live cuts of your model and you can create
them just about anywhere where you need to
| | 00:18 |
get a better look at what's going on in
the model.
| | 00:23 |
I'm in a project called Section and we're
just going to cut a couple sections in
| | 00:26 |
here and take a look at how the tool works.
| | 00:30 |
So, let's think about an area where we
want to get a better look at how things
| | 00:33 |
are coming together.
And I'm thinking that this stair area here
| | 00:38 |
with a balcony up above is a good choice.
I'll start off by zooming in on that
| | 00:44 |
location.
And I'm going to create a couple of
| | 00:48 |
different sections that cut through this
stairwell area.
| | 00:52 |
And show us what's going on there.
So I'm going to do the first one right
| | 00:55 |
here.
And so to get there, you go to the Quick
| | 00:59 |
Access toolbar here and there's a Section tool.
| | 01:03 |
You can also find it on the View tab.
And I'll click that.
| | 01:07 |
And, all you really need to do is click
two points to create the section.
| | 01:12 |
So, I'm going to click right here next to
the stair, but roughly in the middle.
| | 01:18 |
And then you see this line I'm drawing is
going right down the middle of the run of
| | 01:21 |
that stair.
And, I'm going to go the full width of the
| | 01:24 |
building here.
So I'm going to pull it all the way out
| | 01:27 |
and over here and then click again.
So it just takes two clicks.
| | 01:32 |
And when you do, you get several things.
You'll get a symbol here.
| | 01:36 |
It's got some grips on it so you can fine
tune it.
| | 01:39 |
And then if you zoom out a little bit, or
pan actually is what I'm doing.
| | 01:43 |
And I'll pan and zoom slightly.
So you'll see this dash bluish box out
| | 01:48 |
here that has some grips on each side.
Revit will automatically try to make the
| | 01:53 |
extent of this section match the geometry
that you have created.
| | 01:59 |
Another way to show you that is if I just
kind of come over here to empty space.
| | 02:03 |
If I were to create another section over
here, you'll notice that it's just sort of
| | 02:06 |
a generic depth.
Because there's no building there.
| | 02:10 |
It doesn't know what to create.
So I'm going to undo that with Ctrl+Z but
| | 02:13 |
this one, when we created it, it went the
full depth of the building.
| | 02:18 |
So this is why the default template
doesn't include any sections because
| | 02:21 |
there's no geometry so there's really
nothing to look at.
| | 02:24 |
After you've created the section, if you
look over here on the Project Browser,
| | 02:28 |
you'll see a new Sections category.
And if we expand that, we're going to see
| | 02:33 |
Section 1.
Now, one of the things that I always like
| | 02:36 |
to do is right-click on the section that
gets created and rename it to something a
| | 02:40 |
little bit more descriptive.
So, instead of Section 1, I'm going to
| | 02:45 |
just change that to Section at balcony and
click Okay.
| | 02:50 |
Now, you can double-click it here to open
it, or you can right-click the section
| | 02:54 |
line itself and choose Go To View.
Either one will do the same thing.
| | 02:59 |
And that will open up that view and you're
now looking at that section.
| | 03:03 |
So we cut through the building at that
location that we drew with the two clicks
| | 03:06 |
and then we're seeing everything beyond
from that point.
| | 03:10 |
Now, if I zoom in slightly here.
You could start to see that walls and so
| | 03:14 |
forth, they're a little more bold that
were cutting through.
| | 03:18 |
We've got a ceiling plane here, there's a
guard rail right here, this is the floor
| | 03:21 |
slab for the balcony itself and then here
is the stair.
| | 03:25 |
So, we can start to use this section as a
way of understanding how things are coming
| | 03:29 |
together, do we have the right clearances.
Is the volume of the space what we want?
| | 03:35 |
For example, if I come over here and go to
the Dimension tool on the toolbar.
| | 03:39 |
This is the same Dimension tool that we
used to move our walls around, but I can
| | 03:43 |
use this as a quick way to measure whether
or not I've got enough clearance on the
| | 03:46 |
stairwell.
So I'm going to highlight the top of this
| | 03:50 |
landing right here.
And then I'm going to highlight the
| | 03:54 |
underside of this floor slab and I can see
that I've got 11 feet right there.
| | 03:58 |
So that should be more than enough
clearance and enough head room in there so
| | 04:01 |
that we don't have to worry making any modifications.
| | 04:05 |
If it came in too shallow, then we would
have to start manipulating things, either
| | 04:08 |
change the stairs or change the floor slab
or what have you.
| | 04:12 |
So, let's go back to the first floor plan
and create another one.
| | 04:16 |
So I'm going to go back to Level 1.
And lets create a section that goes though
| | 04:21 |
the stair, going the other way this time.
I'll click the same section tool and I'm
| | 04:25 |
going to start here this time.
And pull it straight down like so.
| | 04:31 |
And I'll go all the way through the
building and again it sees the full depth.
| | 04:36 |
Now, if you start here and draw that way
it'll point the other way.
| | 04:41 |
What you do if you accidentally draw the
section the wrong way is don't undo and
| | 04:45 |
start over again.
Just use this little grip here and you can
| | 04:49 |
actually flip it to make it look the other way.
| | 04:51 |
So it's real easy to reverse a section
after you create it.
| | 04:55 |
Usually, it's not something you want to
start over again.
| | 04:58 |
If I scroll down in Project Browser, it's
called Section 1 again, so I'm going to
| | 05:02 |
right-click and rename, Section at Stair.
And let's open that up with Go To View.
| | 05:09 |
Zoom in a little.
And you can now see the stairs going up to
| | 05:13 |
here, we're at the balcony right there and
then here's the guardrail beyond.
| | 05:17 |
Just another angle giving us a sense of
how things are shaping up.
| | 05:21 |
Now, one of the things I notice when I'm
in here is this floor slab here is not
| | 05:25 |
very bold.
The walls here are bold, the walls here
| | 05:29 |
are bold, but this floor slab right here
is a little bit lighter.
| | 05:33 |
And the same is true is this other section here.
| | 05:35 |
This floor slab was also lighter.
What line weight is being used when you
| | 05:39 |
cut through the elements is actually
something that's being controlled in a
| | 05:43 |
dialog called Objects styles.
It's a global set of setting that affects
| | 05:48 |
the entire project.
And we can there on the Manage tab.
| | 05:51 |
So if I go to Manage and click on object
styles, what you're going to see is a list
| | 05:55 |
of all the categories that are available
in a Revit project.
| | 06:00 |
So there's lots of them here.
And if we look at the floor category right
| | 06:04 |
here you'll see that there's a line weight column.
| | 06:08 |
And the projection and the cut line wave
are the same.
| | 06:11 |
They're both pen weight 2.
Now, pen weight 1 is your thinnest line
| | 06:14 |
and it goes up to believe it or not, pen
weight 16, okay?
| | 06:18 |
Now, most of the time 5 or 6 is about the
maximum that most people use.
| | 06:22 |
If we scroll down a little bit here.
And find the walls.
| | 06:27 |
Notice that walls are pen weight 2 in projection.
| | 06:31 |
Projection is what you see when it's
beyond, when you're looking at the object.
| | 06:35 |
And when you cut through it in either plan
or section, this is what you're seeing
| | 06:38 |
here, and it's pen weight 4.
But you can see that there's a difference
| | 06:42 |
between what the floors are using, pen
weight 2.
| | 06:45 |
And what the walls are using, pen weight 4.
| | 06:47 |
What I'm going to do is click in here, use
this little drop-down and choose pen
| | 06:51 |
weight 4 for the floors as well.
Really simple change.
| | 06:56 |
Object styles is global, it effects the
entire project.
| | 06:59 |
So I only need to make that change once.
And when I click Okay.
| | 07:03 |
You can see the floor is now bold and
matches the intensity of the walls.
| | 07:08 |
And it doesn't matter now which section
I'm looking at, the floor is bold in both
| | 07:12 |
cases.
Now, here it's still light because there
| | 07:16 |
we're seeing the floor beyond, we're not
cutting through it.
| | 07:20 |
The only place we're cutting through it is
right here.
| | 07:22 |
So that's just a really quick change that
we can make.
| | 07:26 |
Now, another thing that the section starts
to identify for me right here is this
| | 07:28 |
little gap right here.
So this is something that I might want to
| | 07:32 |
go in and modify.
To modify that, I would just simply select
| | 07:36 |
the floor object and edit its sketch.
So let's do that really quick.
| | 07:40 |
I'm going to select it.
And in her on the ribbon, I can choose
| | 07:44 |
Edit Boundary.
Now, when I do that, it will tell me that
| | 07:48 |
it can't edit the boundary directly from
the Section view because we're looking at
| | 07:51 |
it obliquely.
So I'm what I'm going to do is offer to
| | 07:55 |
open it for me and floor plants.
So I going to choose level two and click
| | 07:59 |
open view.
Let me zoom in on that area.
| | 08:03 |
And you could see the problem.
This line is on this face of the wall
| | 08:06 |
instead of this face of the wall, but what
I'm going to do is just take that line and
| | 08:10 |
drag it over here and then, while I'm at
it, I'll take this one and drag it over
| | 08:13 |
there.
So I've got both of those on the opposite
| | 08:18 |
faces of those walls now, and I'll click Finish.
| | 08:21 |
Revit's going to ask me about the walls
coming up underneath.
| | 08:25 |
I'm just going to say no here.
And then let's go to the Stair Edit
| | 08:29 |
section again.
And you can now see that that floor slab
| | 08:32 |
is extending underneath the wall and it
makes a little bit more sense.
| | 08:38 |
A section cut can do a variety of things
for you.
| | 08:41 |
Sections are necessary drawings to have
along with our document set.
| | 08:45 |
But as you could see, because the section
is a live cut of the building model, it's
| | 08:49 |
a great tool for you to go in and start
looking for where the places are that need
| | 08:52 |
a little bit more attention.
Did we modify this part of the model
| | 08:57 |
correctly, is this connection correct?
And when you cut sections in those areas,
| | 09:02 |
it gives you a direct view where you can
look in and see exactly what's there and
| | 09:05 |
react to it in real time.
So it's a really powerful and useful tool
| | 09:10 |
and you'll find that most Revit users have
dozens and dozens of sections in their
| | 09:14 |
projects.
| | 09:15 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with 3D views| 00:00 |
We've looked at several different views
our Revit models.
| | 00:02 |
We've looked at floor plans, elevations.
We've created sections in the previous
| | 00:05 |
movie.
We've even looked at some 3D views.
| | 00:08 |
But up until now, the 3D views we've
looked at, have either already been in the
| | 00:11 |
project or we've just simply relied on
Revit to create the default 3D view.
| | 00:16 |
Let me just reiterate the steps to create
a default 3D view.
| | 00:19 |
The icon up here on the Quick Access
toolbar, that kind of looks like a
| | 00:22 |
doghouse or birdhouse.
That's the default 3D view icon, and now
| | 00:26 |
here's the way that's going to work.
If I'm in another view, so here I'm in
| | 00:29 |
level one floor plan.
If I click this icon, I want you to watch
| | 00:33 |
right here on the project browser when I
click that icon.
| | 00:37 |
All it will do is open that existing 3D
view, that's got the, the little curly
| | 00:41 |
brackets around it.
What I want to do is change this view
| | 00:44 |
slightly so that we know which one is
which, to make it very different.
| | 00:49 |
Here's what I'm going to do is, down here
on the View Control bar, we have a bunch
| | 00:52 |
of icons, and the third one over is this
little white cube.
| | 00:57 |
And if I click on it, it's a popup menu,
and I'm going to choose Shaded.
| | 01:01 |
So, a really simple change.
Now, the model instead of being a hidden
| | 01:04 |
line view, is a shaded view.
I'm going to right-click on Curly Bracket
| | 01:08 |
3-D here in the browser and rename it.
And I'm going to call this just.
| | 01:13 |
Axon and click Okay.
Now I'm going to deselect that.
| | 01:18 |
And even if I'm not in this view, let me
go back to level one floor plan.
| | 01:21 |
You see it's no longer bold.
Level one floor plan is now bold.
| | 01:25 |
Now watch what happens if I click the
birdhouse again.
| | 01:27 |
Notice that Revit will say wait a minute,
you don't have a default 3D view, so it
| | 01:32 |
will just create a new one.
Now, the reason I shaded the axon view is
| | 01:37 |
just to very clearly show you.
It's still here under the new name, but
| | 01:41 |
Revit decided to create a new default 3D view.
| | 01:46 |
If you want to rely on this icon to open
your default 3D view, you've got make sure
| | 01:49 |
that you keep that default name, otherwise
Revit will just create a new one.
| | 01:55 |
Okay, and that's just what it does.
Alright, now that's not the only way to
| | 01:59 |
create a 3D view.
There are a few other possibilities.
| | 02:02 |
So, one such possibility is to create a
view that kind of looks like this view.
| | 02:06 |
Now this is a perspective view instead of
an X and a metric.
| | 02:09 |
The way this was created was to use the
camera tool.
| | 02:12 |
What I'm going to do is go back to my
floor plan.
| | 02:15 |
You typically want to use the camera tool
in a floor plan view.
| | 02:18 |
Let's take this existing camera view,
right click, and rename it.
| | 02:23 |
And I'll call this street view.
Now, let's pretend the parking lot is back
| | 02:28 |
here and I want to do another view from
the parking lot.
| | 02:31 |
So we're going to make another camera view
back there.
| | 02:34 |
I'm going to come up here to the
birdhouse, but instead of clicking it, I'm
| | 02:37 |
going to click the little icon next to it,
the little drop arrow.
| | 02:41 |
And then I want to choose a camera.
Now camera is really easy to create, all
| | 02:45 |
you have to do is click a point where you
want to stand.
| | 02:49 |
So I'm going to stand over here in what
I'm calling the parking lot.
| | 02:52 |
And then drag towards where you want to look.
| | 02:55 |
So I want to look at the complete
building, so you want to make sure that
| | 02:57 |
you drag far enough to capture the whole building.
| | 03:00 |
So I'm going to click back about here and
then click.
| | 03:05 |
And now you can see that I'm standing in
that direction and I'm looking toward the
| | 03:08 |
view.
Now you can fine tune by rolling the wheel
| | 03:11 |
a little bit and using these little grips here.
| | 03:15 |
To widen the angle of view.
Just be careful that you don't widen it
| | 03:18 |
too much, because it'll start to distort.
Let me see if I can show you that.
| | 03:24 |
If I pull it way out like this, see the
building doesn't continue, but way over
| | 03:27 |
here, it would be kind of fish eye.
I'll show you that in a second.
| | 03:30 |
So let's keep it right there.
It might start to distort here.
| | 03:34 |
it's not too bad.
So that's okay.
| | 03:36 |
But you can fine tune what you have here,
and of course it uses the same default
| | 03:40 |
name again.
So, we might want to rename this one
| | 03:43 |
Parking View.
Camera views you can do anywhere.
| | 03:47 |
You're not limited to just exterior shots,
you can do interior shots.
| | 03:50 |
So, let's go back to level one and let's
do another one.
| | 03:53 |
Let's do one from the dining room.
So I'm going to zoom in here, and we'll
| | 03:55 |
stand maybe over here in the waiting area,
and we'll look toward the dining room.
| | 03:58 |
So we'll do the same process.
Click where we want to stand.
| | 04:03 |
Drag towards where we want to look.
I want to make sure I'm going to click
| | 04:06 |
past the windows here.
Let's go about like that.
| | 04:12 |
(SOUND).
Like so.
| | 04:12 |
And now we're standing there in the
waiting area, looking towards the dining
| | 04:15 |
area.
Now here's where we might be able to
| | 04:17 |
witness the fisheye effect if I drag this
too far.
| | 04:21 |
You can start to see it elongate over here.
| | 04:24 |
Now, so far, it still may be okay.
But if I go too far, you kind of see how
| | 04:28 |
distorted this window starts to look.
So you do want to be a little cautious
| | 04:32 |
about how much you stretch that, because
then it starts to look a little bit
| | 04:35 |
unbelievable.
So, I'm going to back that up just a
| | 04:39 |
touch.
These are stretching out just a little
| | 04:41 |
bit.
So, I'm right on the edge there of what
| | 04:44 |
would be acceptable.
Same thing in this direction.
| | 04:47 |
If I stretch it up a little, it's okay,
but if I go too high it's going to start
| | 04:50 |
to distort things.
And then of course I might want to rename
| | 04:54 |
this.
Now, there's a lot of other things that we
| | 04:56 |
could do in this Perspective view.
Down here, I could shade it, just like we
| | 05:01 |
did with the axon.
So when I choose that, maybe that's a
| | 05:04 |
little bit more interesting.
I can also use this little steering wheel
| | 05:09 |
icon over here on the right to fine-tune
the view.
| | 05:14 |
What, the way this works is if you roll
your wheel.
| | 05:17 |
You are zooming and painting outside of
the view, or think of it like this view is
| | 05:21 |
like a picture frame, and you are just
zooming and painting the picture frame.
| | 05:26 |
If you want to zoom and paint inside the
picture frame, use this little steering
| | 05:30 |
wheel.
So, when I click on that, you will get
| | 05:33 |
this wheel icon right here.
And if I click and hold down on pan you
| | 05:37 |
can see that I'm now panning inside the
picture frame.
| | 05:42 |
If I click and hold down on zoom, I'm now
zooming inside the picture frame.
| | 05:50 |
Now, of course you want to be careful
because at some point you can crash right
| | 05:53 |
into the wall behind you, so Just make
sure that I do that sparingly.
| | 05:57 |
Up and down is like you jump on an
elevator and change your height to ride
| | 06:02 |
up.
So now we're up at that balcony looking
| | 06:06 |
down into the space.
Let me let go there.
| | 06:09 |
Now I'm still looking straight ahead, so I
can use the look option.
| | 06:14 |
And tilt my head down to look down into
the space, so now I'm way up in the
| | 06:17 |
balcony looking down into the dining room.
Now, if you ever get lost, you know, let's
| | 06:23 |
say that I zoom out a little too far and I
crashed through and I'm up in the attic
| | 06:26 |
now.
This rewind feature is a godsend.
| | 06:31 |
Hold it down and you get this little film
strip here.
| | 06:35 |
And you can use this to kind of back up
through all the previous modifications,
| | 06:39 |
both backward and forward, and find the
one that you are happy with, and then you
| | 06:43 |
let go.
You can do as many of these camera views
| | 06:47 |
as you want and just make sure you name
them descriptively so that people can find
| | 06:51 |
them later.
And look at the model from several
| | 06:55 |
different vantage points.
You can use them just as a tool to help
| | 06:58 |
you understand your design, or you can
even print them out and present them to
| | 07:02 |
clients or colleagues as a final
presentation tool.
| | 07:06 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing in any view| 00:00 |
So, we've seen that we can have lots of
different kinds of views in a Revit
| | 00:03 |
project.
Plans, sections, elevations, 3D views.
| | 00:06 |
And one of the most powerful reasons to
use so many different views is that you
| | 00:10 |
can actually edit your model from any view
that you like.
| | 00:14 |
When you're working in Revit, you're
working in a single unified building
| | 00:17 |
model.
Everything's stored in a single project
| | 00:20 |
and it's all connected to one another.
So, if it's more convenient for you to
| | 00:23 |
make an edit in plan, you can do it in plan.
| | 00:26 |
If you'd rather do it in elevation, you
can do it in elevation.
| | 00:30 |
And you can do so without any worry that
you'll have to then go and redo the same
| | 00:33 |
modification in some other view.
This is because these are not disconnected
| | 00:38 |
drawings, rather they are views of the
same unified building model.
| | 00:43 |
So you make a change in one view, it
changes everywhere.
| | 00:45 |
To illustrate that, let me go ahead an
open up a couple different views here.
| | 00:50 |
I'm in a file called Edit in any View, and
I'm currently in the Level 1 Floor Plan.
| | 00:55 |
I'm also going to open up the east
elevation, (SOUND) the Axonometric,
| | 01:01 |
(SOUND) and the Door Schedule.
So one of the ways you could tell which
| | 01:07 |
views you have currently open is to use
this drop-down right here, which will show
| | 01:10 |
you all of the views that are currently open.
| | 01:14 |
So I can see that I have those four
windows that we just double-clicked.
| | 01:17 |
Now, what I want to do is actually tile
them all together on screen.
| | 01:20 |
So I'm going to close this drop-down, come
over here to the View tab, and then over
| | 01:23 |
here on the right, I'm going to click Tile Windows.
| | 01:27 |
That will tile all the windows on screen.
I'm going to click into any one of the
| | 01:31 |
graphical windows and choose Zoom All to Fit.
| | 01:36 |
Now I'm going to fine tune a few of these.
Zoom in a little bit more on the 3D view,
| | 01:40 |
zoom in a little bit more on the Plan
view, and a little bit more on the
| | 01:43 |
Elevation view.
And I'm just doing the wheel for that.
| | 01:47 |
Okay.
So let's look at a really simple example.
| | 01:49 |
I can see here that I've got this really
big, blank wall here in the east
| | 01:52 |
elevation.
You can see it also here in the 3D view.
| | 01:57 |
It wouldn't really be very easy to do
something about that from the floor plan
| | 02:01 |
that I currently have open.
But there's no reason I can't do something
| | 02:06 |
about that using the elevation, so what
I'm going to do is click here to the left
| | 02:11 |
of the last window, and drag to the right.
Now the one thing you've gotta notice here
| | 02:17 |
is it's highlight a bunch of stuff beyond.
So, I'm going to show you a trick there
| | 02:21 |
for selection that I haven't talked about yet.
| | 02:24 |
But I'm going to first make the rough
selection here and you see that I've
| | 02:27 |
highlighted all six windows.
Now, in addition to the six windows, I got
| | 02:32 |
some other stuff, and you can kind of see
it in the plan view.
| | 02:35 |
I got some tables, I got some countertops.
Heck, I even got the stair, way in the
| | 02:39 |
background.
Clearly I don't want to copy all of that
| | 02:42 |
stuff.
I only want it to copy the windows.
| | 02:45 |
Well, if you look over here on the
properties palette, you can get some
| | 02:48 |
feedback as to what you have selected.
It says common And then 20.
| | 02:53 |
Now common means that of the 20 items you
have selected, these are the properties
| | 02:57 |
they have in common.
And, it's basically nothing.
| | 03:01 |
Up here on the ribbon is a filter button.
This is a really useful command.
| | 03:07 |
It allows you to make a big selection of
stuff that you want, too many things, in
| | 03:10 |
this case.
20 things, when I only wanted six.
| | 03:14 |
You click Filter, and then you can clear
the check boxes for all the categories
| | 03:19 |
you're not interested in selecting.
So I'm going to check none.
| | 03:24 |
That's going to clear all the check boxes.
And then instead I'm going to select only
| | 03:28 |
the Windows check box, and notice the
quantity is Six, which is exactly what I
| | 03:32 |
want.
So it will deselect all of those other
| | 03:36 |
elements and now I can copy these windows
with confidence.
| | 03:40 |
So I'm going to go to copy, pick a base
point, and then move up to where I want
| | 03:45 |
that copy to go.
And I'm in the multiple copy.
| | 03:51 |
So I'm actually going to click twice to
make two sets of copies.
| | 03:54 |
And then I'll cancel out of the command.
Notice that the change is instantly
| | 03:58 |
reflected not only in the east elevation,
but also in the 3D view.
| | 04:03 |
So that's a really simple example.
Let's look at another example.
| | 04:06 |
Over here in the schedule, I notice that
this door number five, which is this door
| | 04:12 |
right here.
I'm going to zoom in on that in plane a
| | 04:16 |
little bit.
That door over there is just a simple
| | 04:19 |
little single swing door.
And that's going into the kitchen area.
| | 04:23 |
So it probably ought to be a double door.
And it probably ought to be a door that
| | 04:26 |
can swing in both directions.
So, I've got the wrong type of door there,
| | 04:29 |
but I can identify it here in the schedule
and even select it here in the schedule
| | 04:33 |
and then if I click over here in the floor
plan, it stays selected and now I can just
| | 04:37 |
open up the list and choose the
appropriate type door.
| | 04:43 |
So here I've got a door called double
flush, double acting.
| | 04:46 |
This is from the standard imperial folder,
the chips with the software.
| | 04:50 |
And you could see that I can choose that
double door and now the changes reflected
| | 04:54 |
both in the plan and directly in the schedule.
| | 04:57 |
The schedule now reports the new size for
that door.
| | 05:02 |
Let me open up another view and show you
another example.
| | 05:05 |
Here is this dining from above 3D view
that we created in the last movie.
| | 05:09 |
Now I'm going to take this view and.
Adjusted slightly so that it takes up may
| | 05:15 |
be half of the screen here nad lets take a
look at these columns here.
| | 05:22 |
Notice that all those columns stop a
little bit short of the ceiling an what
| | 05:25 |
you are seeing is the steel that's inside
of them and taht may be a little unsightly
| | 05:30 |
for your dining room.
So, what I want to do, is, change the,
| | 05:35 |
hight of those columns, so that they go
all the way up.
| | 05:40 |
Certain edits, you can do, in any view,
depending on the kind of edit that you
| | 05:44 |
want to do.
You can't, do, things like, move, and
| | 05:47 |
copy, and rotate, directly in a
perspective view.
| | 05:50 |
Notice those buttons are grayed out.
If I was in a plan view all those buttons
| | 05:54 |
become available.
So if they're grayed out you can use the
| | 05:57 |
perspective view to make the selection,
and then you can switch over to a plan.
| | 06:01 |
But it turns out that whether or not I'm
in perspective or plan doesn't make a
| | 06:05 |
difference for what I want to change,
because what I want to change is over here
| | 06:08 |
on the properties pallet.
If you look there's a base constraint
| | 06:13 |
level one.
This column starts down at level one.
| | 06:17 |
There's a top constraint level two and
that's the problem.
| | 06:20 |
It's only going up to level two.
I'm going to make it go all the way up to
| | 06:23 |
the roof.
Now the trouble with that is watch the top
| | 06:27 |
of the column when I apply that.
It's going to go up through the ceiling
| | 06:31 |
all the way to the roof level so now it's
a little bit too tall.
| | 06:35 |
Let me zoom in just a little bit here to
show you.
| | 06:37 |
The eye could come over here, and further
modify it by putting in a top offset.
| | 06:42 |
I'm going to put in negative 4 feet, and
when I apply that, it pulls it down to
| | 06:46 |
just underneath the ceiling.
Let's go ahead and deselect it.
| | 06:51 |
And you can see the final result.
So this is yet another example of where
| | 06:54 |
you can identify a problem, make the
selection and make it edit in one view,
| | 06:57 |
it's reflected in any view.
So let me show you that again.
| | 07:01 |
Here it might be easier To select a couple
columns in the plane view and then we'll
| | 07:05 |
be able to see the change interactively in
the 3D view as we work.
| | 07:11 |
So to do that, I'm just going to click on
one of these columns, hold down my control
| | 07:15 |
key and click the second column.
And you can see both of those square
| | 07:20 |
columns that we're looking at there in 3D
are highlighted now.
| | 07:23 |
I come over here to the properties
palette, put them up to the roof, and then
| | 07:28 |
set the negative top offset.
And when I apply that, you're going to see
| | 07:33 |
that those two columns will extend up in
the same way as the round one did.
| | 07:37 |
So a big advantage of working in a Revit
model is that you're actually working on a
| | 07:40 |
model.
So any change you make plan, section, or
| | 07:43 |
elevation applies everywhere to all views.
You don't have to make the same change
| | 07:48 |
over and over again in multiple, separate,
and disconnected drawings.
| | 07:52 |
You make the change once in the view
that's most convenient and it
| | 07:55 |
automatically takes care of itself
everywhere else throughout the model.
| | 07:58 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Color fill diagram| 00:00 |
In this movie I'd like to introduce you to
the Room Object, and specifically how to
| | 00:04 |
create a color fill plan from the Room Objects.
| | 00:08 |
The Room Objects in Revit represent the
actual rooms, or the spaces that are
| | 00:11 |
enclosed by your walls and other geometry.
One of the features that Room Objects have
| | 00:17 |
is the ability to be color-coded to
represent various information about our
| | 00:20 |
space.
So what I'd like to do is create a color
| | 00:23 |
presentation plan here that indicates the
function of each of the spaces in my
| | 00:27 |
overall plan.
So the basic process we need to follow is
| | 00:31 |
an overall three steps.
We need to add some rooms, which are
| | 00:34 |
going to represent the actual spaces.
We need to assign data to those rooms to
| | 00:37 |
represent their different funcionts.
And then finally create a color scheme
| | 00:41 |
that will color based on those functions.
So, it starts with the Room Object which
| | 00:45 |
we can find on the Architecture tab here
on the Room and Area panel right here.
| | 00:49 |
Now, the way that the room object behaves
is that if you move your mouse into the
| | 00:53 |
screen you'll see that if I were to click
outside the building I would get just this
| | 00:57 |
generic rectangle.
And Revit would actually generate a
| | 01:02 |
warning telling me the room was unbounded,
because there's no surrounding geometry.
| | 01:06 |
But as soon as you move your mouse into
the space, you see how it starts to
| | 01:09 |
conform to the shape of the surrounding rooms?
| | 01:13 |
So, that's probably a little bit more the
behavior that I'm after.
| | 01:17 |
The trouble is, is that most of my space
is an open plan and if I move out here
| | 01:20 |
into this main space, you can see that
that room fills in to everywhere, public
| | 01:24 |
spaces, private spaces, and so on, because
there's no separation between any of
| | 01:28 |
those.
So, before I start placing the rooms, I
| | 01:34 |
need to do one little bit of pre-work.
So, I'm going to press escape to cancel
| | 01:39 |
out of here.
And then, right below the room button,
| | 01:42 |
there's a little separator button.
Room separators are just lines.
| | 01:46 |
And you can draw them straight lines or
curved lines, whatever shape they need to
| | 01:49 |
be.
And you use them to separate two spaces
| | 01:52 |
from one another.
So, for example, I might want to have this
| | 01:56 |
vestibule space separated from This host area.
| | 02:01 |
I might want this host area to be its own
separate space.
| | 02:06 |
I certainly want to separate the back of
house area, so I can put a line there.
| | 02:11 |
This prep area here might also want to be
its own space, and so notice how I'm
| | 02:15 |
ignoring this counter top and I'm going
right over to the walls.
| | 02:21 |
The countertop is not a room seperator,
but walls are.
| | 02:25 |
So you want to make sure that you're
creating fully enclosed spaces.
| | 02:31 |
Now I also don't want the room to flow up
here into the stairs.
| | 02:34 |
So I'm just going to draw A little L shape
right there.
| | 02:39 |
Now, I'll cancel out of there, and let me
show you the result of what just did.
| | 02:43 |
So let me make sure that the command is reset.
| | 02:45 |
I'll click the Modify tool and go back to
the Room tool, and I'm going to slowly
| | 02:48 |
move around.
Now, we already say these spaces.
| | 02:52 |
Here's the vestibule space.
Here's the host area.
| | 02:54 |
Here's the prep area.
Here's the main dining room, and notice
| | 02:58 |
the main dining room is ignoring the
stairwell, and then finally the back of
| | 03:02 |
house area here.
When you add those room separators in, it
| | 03:06 |
makes it really easy to place the rooms
exactly where you want them.
| | 03:09 |
The next thing is you want to place them
in the order you want them numbered in,
| | 03:13 |
because as you'll see here, the first one
you click becomes number one.
| | 03:17 |
And then this one here will be number two.
This'll be number three, the main dining
| | 03:22 |
room so, I'll place it out here.
Our little prep area and then our back of
| | 03:27 |
house area here.
And then I'll finally end up with this
| | 03:31 |
storage area and the two restrooms.
Now, we could certainly rename all of
| | 03:37 |
those rooms, it's easy enough to do.
Just zoom in on the tag, select the tag,
| | 03:41 |
then click again right on the label and
you can input the name of the room.
| | 03:47 |
Now, I'm going to skip the rest for now.
And move on to the next step.
| | 03:52 |
If you move your mouse around in the
space, you'll see that at four points
| | 03:56 |
around that room tag, there is this x
right here.
| | 04:00 |
Now, if you highlight it, Revit tells you
that's the room.
| | 04:03 |
If you click when you see that x It
actually selects the room object.
| | 04:08 |
And then over here, on Properties, you can
manipulate that room object.
| | 04:13 |
So, what I want to do is scroll down here
and look at some of the other properties.
| | 04:18 |
So I've got various properties.
I've got Comments, Occupancy, Department.
| | 04:22 |
I've got finish Finish Information.
There's a color scheme already built into
| | 04:26 |
this template that colors based on the department.
| | 04:29 |
Now, department is more of a commercial designation.
| | 04:32 |
I don't think we would use the word
department in a restaurant situation but
| | 04:36 |
in this case I'm going to use the
department field for the function.
| | 04:42 |
Now, it is possible to create my own
custom function field but I don't really
| | 04:45 |
think that it's necessary in this case.
I'm just going to borrow department for
| | 04:48 |
that purpose.
You can type in any value you want here
| | 04:52 |
for department, it's just a text field.
I can put in public areas, for example,
| | 04:57 |
for the main dining room, for this room I
can make that back of house and I am just
| | 05:01 |
going to put one or two more designations here.
| | 05:06 |
So I could select each of these toilet
rooms here using my Ctrl key.
| | 05:11 |
If you're having trouble selecting one of
the rooms, just use your Tab key and it
| | 05:14 |
will highlight.
And then make sure Ctrl is held down when
| | 05:18 |
you click.
And I'll just call these toilet rooms.
| | 05:21 |
This one here will also be back of house.
Now, if you click in the field and you've
| | 05:25 |
already types a value, you don't have to
type it again.
| | 05:28 |
You can just use this little drop-down here.
| | 05:30 |
And choose the item that you've already
typed in.
| | 05:32 |
So Ravit keeps tracks of those.
And lets just do one or two more here.
| | 05:36 |
This is a public area, and we'll make the
host station also a public area.
| | 05:44 |
I've designated each of the rooms with a designation.
| | 05:47 |
I've numbered them all.
I've named a few.
| | 05:49 |
We can come back and do the other naming
later, but the last step is to add the
| | 05:53 |
color scheme now.
So if we go to the Annotate tab and look
| | 05:57 |
over here on the right, we see a Color
Fill panel.
| | 06:02 |
Now, depending on your Revit, your Color
Fill Panel may have only one button, it
| | 06:05 |
may have several buttons.
If you're in the suite version then you
| | 06:09 |
have several buttons but, if you're in
Revit Architecture you only have the one.
| | 06:14 |
But what we're looking for is Color Fill Legend.
| | 06:17 |
And you can see that's the button right here.
| | 06:20 |
I'm going to just place that somewhere off
to the side of the screen here.
| | 06:24 |
And you can see the message says that
there's no scheme currently assigned to
| | 06:27 |
the view.
As soon as I click though, it will ask me
| | 06:30 |
to do just that.
It will ask me to assign a scheme.
| | 06:34 |
So you can see here that.
The space type that it's looking for is
| | 06:37 |
spaces.
But I don't want to color spaces.
| | 06:40 |
In fact, I don't even have any spaces in here.
| | 06:42 |
Those are engineering objects.
We have rooms which are architectural
| | 06:45 |
objects.
So I want to choose rooms.
| | 06:48 |
And then notice that the color scheme that
will become available is department.
| | 06:52 |
So this is why I chose the department
field to input my functions.
| | 06:57 |
And when I click Okay, you will see that
Revit will automatically assign a color to
| | 07:01 |
each one of those departments that we
typed in.
| | 07:06 |
And this legend that we placed over here
will fill in the label next to each one to
| | 07:10 |
show us what each of those colors means.
So just a few clicks is all it takes for
| | 07:15 |
you to make this very nice graphical
presentation, which illustrates the
| | 07:19 |
function of all of the various spaces in
the model.
| | 07:24 |
Now I did a really simple example here.
But you can imagine that if you spent a
| | 07:27 |
little bit more time thinking about
exactly what you wanted the color scheme
| | 07:29 |
to represent, that there's all sorts of
things that you could do with this
| | 07:32 |
functionality.
| | 07:35 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Visibility| 00:00 |
This movie I'd like to talk about
visibility graphic overrides.
| | 00:03 |
We use visibilty graphic overrides to
customize the way that a particular
| | 00:07 |
displays.
All of the model elements that you see in
| | 00:10 |
a view represent real life objects, and as
we've seen in previous movies, if you
| | 00:13 |
modify them in one view they modify in all views.
| | 00:17 |
But with visibility graphics overrides, we
can actually customize the way those model
| | 00:21 |
objects display in a particular view.
A really simple example is that you could
| | 00:26 |
have your walls be purple in one view and
leave them black in another view, or you
| | 00:30 |
could turn off your furniture in one view
and leave it turned on in another view.
| | 00:36 |
And the list of possibilities is virtually endless.
| | 00:39 |
I've got a file here on screen called
Viibility and it's got a color fill
| | 00:43 |
assigned to it right now for the rooms.
And what I'd like to do is customize this
| | 00:47 |
plan a little bit further.
I want to make it into a more complete
| | 00:51 |
presentation plan.
So I've got some ideas about how I might
| | 00:54 |
want to do that.
Now the first thing is, is best practice
| | 00:57 |
dictates that we really ought to do this
work in a copy of this floor plan.
| | 01:02 |
If you notice over here on my project
browser, I'm currently in level 1 floor
| | 01:05 |
plan.
If I right click that, I've got some ways
| | 01:08 |
that I can duplicate this view.
Now, let me kind of contrast these two to
| | 01:13 |
you here, Duplicate and Duplicate with detailing.
| | 01:16 |
I'm going to choose Duplicate, and notice
what I get.
| | 01:19 |
I get a copy of the graphics.
I get a copy of the view with all the
| | 01:23 |
model elements.
But none of the annotation gets
| | 01:26 |
duplicated, so I lost the dimensions, I
lost the room tags, that kind of
| | 01:30 |
information is view specific.
Now, if I go back to the original level
| | 01:36 |
one, it's still here.
So, it's not that it deleted it every
| | 01:39 |
where.
It's just that it didn't get copied
| | 01:42 |
actually, is the correct way to say it, to
the new copy of the view.
| | 01:46 |
Now let's contrast that to duplicate with detailing.
| | 01:50 |
Detailing is just the word that Revit uses
to collectively refer to all of that view
| | 01:53 |
specific stuff.
The notes, the texts, the dimensions, the
| | 01:57 |
legends, the tags.
Those are all collectively referred to as
| | 02:00 |
detailing.
And you can see that this time I got a
| | 02:02 |
copy of the view complete with all of its
detailing, so you can do it either way.
| | 02:08 |
I'm going to right-click this new view,
and I'm going to rename it as presentation
| | 02:12 |
plan.
I'm going to take the original copy of
| | 02:14 |
level 1 and I'll just press my delete key
to get rid of that.
| | 02:17 |
I don't need that one anymore.
Now there's a few ways we can start to
| | 02:20 |
customize the way that this view displays.
So the first thing that we are going to
| | 02:24 |
look at is the walls.
Now let's go over here to View tab, and on
| | 02:28 |
the Graphics panel here, there's a button
called Visibility Graphics, and this is
| | 02:32 |
the Visibility Graphic overrides for floor
plan presentation.
| | 02:38 |
So it's important to realize that any
changes we make in this dialogue are only
| | 02:42 |
going to affect the current view that we
have open.
| | 02:46 |
They do not apply across the entire project.
| | 02:48 |
So I'm only going to focus on the model
tab right now, and then only on specific
| | 02:52 |
categories.
So we've got model categories here, and
| | 02:55 |
then in this column, you can see all of
the various categories listed.
| | 02:59 |
Now let's scroll down and locate the walls category.
| | 03:03 |
And I'll select that.
If you look across at all the columns on
| | 03:06 |
the right here, we've got projection and
surface, we've got cut, we've got this
| | 03:09 |
half tone and detail level.
Under projection and surface, we have
| | 03:13 |
lines patterns transparency, and then the
cut, we have lines and patterns.
| | 03:17 |
All of our walls are being cut through in
a floor plan.
| | 03:19 |
It's just like you learned in architecture school.
| | 03:22 |
Basically, imagine you're cutting through
the building at a few feet above the
| | 03:25 |
floor, and all those walls are actually
being cut through.
| | 03:28 |
If I want to make a modification to the
way that the walls display in this plan,
| | 03:31 |
it's the cut that I want to consider.
Now, we could customize the line work,
| | 03:35 |
which is the outline that we're cutting
through, or we could customize the
| | 03:38 |
pattern, that's what I'm going to do here.
The pattern is the fill that we're seeing
| | 03:43 |
between the two lines.
Now currently, there's no pattern being
| | 03:47 |
assigned, but if I come down here, I can
click this Override button.
| | 03:51 |
That will give me some options for the
fill pattern, and I'm going to choose a
| | 03:54 |
pattern with this browse button here.
And you can see that I have a whole bunch
| | 03:58 |
of patterns to choose from.
I can choose cross hatches, and I can
| | 04:02 |
choose diagonal lines, and so on.
I'm going to come down here and pick a
| | 04:06 |
solid fill, click Okay.
Now it's currently solid black.
| | 04:10 |
That may be a little bit overpowering, so
let me click right above that on the
| | 04:14 |
color, and let's choose a color that's
maybe a little bit less intense.
| | 04:18 |
So I'm going to pick this greenish right here.
| | 04:21 |
Click Okay, and you could see that that
updates the solid fill to that color.
| | 04:25 |
Let's click Okay again, and one more time
to see the effect.
| | 04:29 |
Notice that all of the walls now in this
plan are now shaded in with that greenish
| | 04:33 |
color, in their, cut pattern.
And that happened across the entire plan.
| | 04:39 |
Now it's really important to understand
that that change only affects this view,
| | 04:43 |
Presentation Plan.
If I go back to Level 1 floor plan, notice
| | 04:47 |
that these walls, are unaffected by the change.
| | 04:50 |
So let's go back to presentation.
So what else can we do?
| | 04:54 |
Well, I'm going to pan this drawing over a
little bit and zoom in so that we can see
| | 04:57 |
the furniture a little bit more clearly,
and let's do another example with the
| | 05:00 |
furniture.
So I'm going to go back to visibility
| | 05:03 |
graphics here on the view tab, and I've
got the dialogue over here on the left,
| | 05:07 |
and I've got my furniture showing there on
the right.
| | 05:10 |
Let's select the furniture category.
And look at some of the other things we
| | 05:14 |
can do.
So if you wanted to, you could override
| | 05:16 |
the line pattern.
Now this is in projection this time,
| | 05:20 |
because we're not cutting through the furniture.
| | 05:22 |
We're actually looking down on the
furniture, so it's the projection line,
| | 05:25 |
and you could change the line weight and
choose a different line weight.
| | 05:29 |
You could change its color or assign a
line pattern, a dashed line so you could
| | 05:32 |
make them dashed or dotted lines or what
have you.
| | 05:36 |
I'm not going to do any of those changes here.
| | 05:38 |
So I'll cancel that.
But I am going to look at the pattern.
| | 05:41 |
Maybe I want to put a surface pattern on
the surface of those furniture items.
| | 05:47 |
So I'm going to click on this overwrite
button here and open up the list of
| | 05:50 |
patterns.
And maybe choose this diagonal crosshatch.
| | 05:54 |
When I click okay and then apply that, you
can see that this hatch pattern now fills
| | 05:58 |
in all the furniture in the same way that
we just did with the walls.
| | 06:04 |
So that's one option.
You could also decide, you don't want to
| | 06:06 |
see the furniture at all.
You could turn it off altogether.
| | 06:09 |
I could uncheck this box, click Apply, and
the furniture would disappear.
| | 06:14 |
So regardless of whatever customization
you've done to it, it's simply not
| | 06:17 |
displaying.
I want to stress that we've only hidden it
| | 06:20 |
in this view.
The furniture still exists in the model.
| | 06:24 |
Okay, let's turn it back on.
Let's click Apply.
| | 06:26 |
Next to it is a transparency slider, so if
you click the override there, you get the
| | 06:30 |
slider.
0% transparent means 100% opaque, so it's
| | 06:34 |
a little confusing.
Let's drag this slider and make it about
| | 06:39 |
45% transparent.
Click Okay, and apply that.
| | 06:43 |
Notice that that greenish color for the
fill pattern underneath is now showing
| | 06:47 |
through the furniture.
So that's another effect that you could
| | 06:51 |
start to do there.
Let me take that, let's turn off the
| | 06:54 |
transparency, going back to 0%.
And what about half-tone?
| | 06:58 |
See what that looks like.
Click Apply.
| | 07:01 |
Now it goes back to being fully opaque,
but notice that instead of solid black
| | 07:05 |
lines for the outlines, all the outlines
are now in this half tone gray color.
| | 07:11 |
As you can see, there's a variety of
different things that you can start to do.
| | 07:14 |
And I'm only addressing one category.
Every category in this list could be
| | 07:19 |
customized accordingly, and again it would
apply to this view.
| | 07:25 |
So if you start to combine the potential
that's available in that Visibility
| | 07:28 |
Graphics dialog, and combine that with
creating multiple views to serve different
| | 07:32 |
purposes.
It becomes very easy for you to create
| | 07:36 |
highly focused views that is specialized
on delivering a certain kind of
| | 07:40 |
information.
So the visibility graphics command is this
| | 07:44 |
very powerful tool that allows you to
acheive multiple views, each focused
| | 07:47 |
towards a very specific purpose in your
document set.
| | 07:51 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Creating DocumentationCreating an enlarged floor plan| 00:00 |
In this movie I'd like to begin creating
some specific documentation for our
| | 00:03 |
project.
Now there's a wide variety of
| | 00:05 |
documentation types that are required in a
typical architectural project.
| | 00:09 |
And in this movie, I'm going to look at
creating an enlarged floor plan of the
| | 00:13 |
dining area.
We're going to use that floor plan for a
| | 00:16 |
variety of things.
But it starts with creating a Callout
| | 00:18 |
View.
So, Revit has lots of different view types
| | 00:21 |
as we've seen.
So this will be the first time we look at
| | 00:24 |
the Callout View.
I'm here in a file called Enlarged Floor
| | 00:27 |
Plan.
And on the View tab, you can see lots of
| | 00:30 |
different types of views here on the
create panel.
| | 00:34 |
We've got our 3D view and our section view
that we've looked at before.
| | 00:37 |
Right next to that is the Callout button here.
| | 00:39 |
If we click the drop down on the Callout
button, we see that it has two options.
| | 00:45 |
It has Rectangular and Sketch.
Now If I did the Rectangular Callout, it's
| | 00:49 |
a little bit easier because you just click
two opposite points on a rectangle.
| | 00:54 |
I could click from here to here.
But what you would end up with is about
| | 00:57 |
half of the kitchen would be included in
that callout area and that maybe
| | 01:01 |
undesirable as the kitchen gets flushed
out later in the project.
| | 01:07 |
You might not want to see all that
equipment and so forth in the dining room
| | 01:09 |
plan.
The alternative is to use this Sketch
| | 01:12 |
option right here.
So this is what I'm going to do.
| | 01:14 |
I'm going to choose the Sketch choice of
that drop-down.
| | 01:18 |
And that takes me into what Revit calls
Sketch mode.
| | 01:22 |
Now Sketch mode is a where you create a
two-dimensional sketch using the various
| | 01:25 |
tools here on the Draw panel, and you can
create any shape you like.
| | 01:29 |
So, in this case, what I'm going to do is
I'll start out here, next to the
| | 01:32 |
staircase.
And I'll just click my first point.
| | 01:35 |
And I'm just going to start drawing some lines.
| | 01:37 |
And all I really want to do is make sure
that these lines are a little bit larger
| | 01:41 |
than the dining room area.
Down in the corner there where I have that
| | 01:46 |
curve.
You can only draw straight lines in this
| | 01:49 |
sketch.
But in this case, that curve is subtle
| | 01:51 |
enough that I don't have to worry too much
about following it exactly.
| | 01:54 |
Now you want to make sure that your sketch
is completely closed when you're done.
| | 01:58 |
And in other words you want to join up the
first point with the last point.
| | 02:02 |
And then you'll click the Modify tool
here, or press Escape twice.
| | 02:06 |
You can see the shape of your callout, and
when I come up here on the ribbon I can
| | 02:09 |
click this big green Finish Edit mode.
And when I do, you'll see a dashed outline
| | 02:15 |
appear in the shape of that callout that
we just created.
| | 02:20 |
Now, it'll have this bubble associated
with it over here.
| | 02:22 |
That bubble will eventually fill in with
the drawing number and sheet number that
| | 02:27 |
this callout gets placed on.
Later when we place views on sheets, we'll
| | 02:31 |
see that fill in.
For the time being, what I want to do is
| | 02:35 |
use this grip right here, that's connected
directly to the callout head and start to
| | 02:39 |
drag it.
And notice that you can move this, this
| | 02:44 |
call out head anywhere that you like.
It'll stay attached to the perimeter of
| | 02:49 |
that callout.
I'm going to move it down here into the
| | 02:51 |
lower right-hand corner, and put it at a
slight angle like so.
| | 02:55 |
I am going to click in empty space to
deselect the callout.
| | 02:58 |
And if you look over at the Project
browser, you'll see that a new view has
| | 03:02 |
been created called Callout of Level 1.
Now, you can accept the name if you like
| | 03:07 |
but I am going to rename it by
right-clicking (SOUND) and I am going to
| | 03:10 |
call it Enlarged Dining Room Plan.
Click OK.
| | 03:13 |
Now, to open that view, you can either
select it here, right-click, and choose Go
| | 03:17 |
To View.
Or you can just simply double-click it
| | 03:20 |
right here on the project browser.
Either one is fine.
| | 03:23 |
When the view opens, you're going to see
the boundary here, the inner boundary,
| | 03:26 |
matches the shape that you sketched for
the callout.
| | 03:29 |
Notice that it has little blue grips on
each edge.
| | 03:33 |
And you can use these to fine tune the
shape of the call out.
| | 03:37 |
So, for example, right here you can see
that I've kind of unnaturally cut off
| | 03:41 |
that, that doorway right there.
So, if I wanted to, I could use this grip
| | 03:45 |
to start stretching that just slightly to
make the call out include the entire door.
| | 03:52 |
If there turns out to be some equipment or
other things in here that you don't
| | 03:55 |
want to see, you could actually choose
Edit Crop that would take you back into
| | 03:58 |
the Sketch mode.
And you could literally draw the sketch up
| | 04:02 |
and around the doorway.
And if you want to try that I'll leave
| | 04:05 |
that up to you, but for now I'm going to
just go with it like this.
| | 04:09 |
So I will just make any little adjustments
here, just to fine tune it slightly.
| | 04:14 |
There's a few other things that you'll
notice here that we might want to address.
| | 04:17 |
For example, these grid lines here extend
all the way to the virtual rectangle here.
| | 04:23 |
And that's simply because the behavior of
grid lines is for them to remain lined up
| | 04:26 |
with one another.
So A and B, it makes sense for them to go
| | 04:29 |
a little bit past the callout boundary.
But C, maybe not so much.
| | 04:34 |
So what you can do here, is you can select
grid line C.
| | 04:38 |
And then, you want to be careful not to
start to drag it, because if you drag it,
| | 04:42 |
it will drag all of them.
I'm going to do Control+Z and undo that.
| | 04:46 |
But I'm going to grab gridline C, and
instead, I'm going to unlock this end.
| | 04:50 |
So when I do that, now this little blue
dot here, I can drag gridline C, like so,
| | 04:55 |
and it will only affect gridline C.
And I could do the same thing with grid 4.
| | 05:01 |
Unlock it.
Grab this little dot.
| | 05:06 |
Stretch that down.
And if you want, you can do the same thing
| | 05:10 |
with grid 5.
Unlock it.
| | 05:12 |
Drag it down.
And I'm going to let this one snap to
| | 05:14 |
gridline 4.
So now what'll happen is these two will
| | 05:18 |
move together. See?
| | 05:21 |
So if I fine tune them further, they'll
move together, but grid 6 moves
| | 05:24 |
independently.
So these are just some little fine tuning
| | 05:27 |
adjustments you can make if you like.
You don't have to see this outer rectangle
| | 05:31 |
for the callout if you don't want to.
So there's some toggle switches down here
| | 05:35 |
at the bottom of the screen, on the View
control bar.
| | 05:38 |
The first one is here, looks like a little
crop symbol.
| | 05:41 |
If you highlight it, it says, Do Not Crop
the View.
| | 05:43 |
If you click that, it actually turns off
the cropping behavior.
| | 05:47 |
And if I zoom out, you notice we're seeing
the entire floor plan again.
| | 05:50 |
But notice, the crop is still here.
The crop region doesn't get deleted, it
| | 05:54 |
just gets disabled.
So I'm going to re-enable it by clicking
| | 05:57 |
that icon again.
The one next to it hides the cropped
| | 06:01 |
region.
So if I click that, it stays cropped, but
| | 06:05 |
it just turns off the display of that shape.
| | 06:10 |
That might make the view look a little bit
cleaner here.
| | 06:12 |
Now, one more thing to point out to you here.
| | 06:15 |
When you create a callout view, Revit
automatically adjusts the scale.
| | 06:19 |
So, you may notice that all the annotation
is a little bit smaller here.
| | 06:21 |
That's because the scale for this view has
changed to quarter inch equals a foot.
| | 06:25 |
The original view was at eighth inch
equals a foot and Revit just simply
| | 06:28 |
doubles the scale.
I'm going to make one or two more
| | 06:31 |
adjustments here.
This section line that goes all the way
| | 06:33 |
through.
You can actually modify that if you like.
| | 06:36 |
So, I'm going to click on it.
And do you see this little small, it
| | 06:38 |
almost looks like a little Z-shape right here.
| | 06:41 |
It says Gaps and Segments.
If I click that, you will actually make a
| | 06:44 |
gap in the middle of this and then you get
a grip at each end.
| | 06:48 |
(SOUND) And I can eliminate that middle portion.
| | 06:51 |
I can do it again with this one (SOUND)
and eliminate that portion.
| | 06:56 |
None of this really affects the section itself.
| | 06:58 |
It's just affecting the graphic here in
this view.
| | 07:00 |
Likewise here.
Maybe I don't want that quite so long.
| | 07:03 |
So I can shorten it a little bit.
So these are all fine tune adjustments you
| | 07:08 |
can make to start cleaning up the view a
little bit.
| | 07:10 |
And, one last adjustment that I want to do
is these lines right here.
| | 07:15 |
You may recall in a previous movie where
we added rooms and did a colored room
| | 07:18 |
plan.
That we added these room separation lines
| | 07:21 |
to make a distinction between the various
spaces in this open plan.
| | 07:26 |
Well, you don't have to actually keep the
display of these room separation lines if
| | 07:29 |
you don't want to.
If you recall, we had a command called
| | 07:33 |
Visibility Graphics.
That was here on the View tab.
| | 07:36 |
Visibility Graphics, and the Room
Separation lines are actually down here
| | 07:40 |
under a category called Lines.
And if I expand that with this little plus
| | 07:45 |
sign right here, you can see the Room
Separations right there.
| | 07:49 |
So I'm going to uncheck that, click OK,
and you're going to see those boundary
| | 07:52 |
lines disappear.
But notice the room is still there, the
| | 07:55 |
room is still there and it's still shaped
by those room separation lines.
| | 07:59 |
In fact, if I go back to Level 1, you'll
see that if I zoom in those room
| | 08:03 |
separation lines are still displaying here
in Level 1.
| | 08:08 |
So all we did was hide them here in the
Enlarged Floor Plan view, so it makes this
| | 08:11 |
view display a little nicer.
If those room separation lines display,
| | 08:16 |
they will print.
So this is why I'm hiding them because,
| | 08:18 |
ultimately, I'm not going to want to print
in this view.
| | 08:22 |
So a Callout view is an enlarged view of
any of your other views in your project.
| | 08:28 |
Here, we did a plan example but you can
actually use the Callout tool on sections
| | 08:31 |
and elevations as well.
Callout shapes can be either a simple
| | 08:35 |
rectangle or they can be a custom shape.
And you use your Callout views to focus in
| | 08:40 |
on a certain area that you want to
document in a little bit more detail in
| | 08:43 |
your project.
| | 08:45 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Dimensioning a plan| 00:00 |
In this movie I'd like to take another
look at dimensioning.
| | 00:03 |
In a previous movie we looked at
dimensioning but there we used the
| | 00:06 |
Dimension tool as a modification tool to
help us move our geometry around.
| | 00:10 |
To get our walls placed precisely, or our
doors and windows, and that's a perfectly
| | 00:13 |
valid use for the dimension tool.
Another valid use, and a very critical use
| | 00:17 |
of the dimension tool, is to actually
create dimensions on your drawings for the
| | 00:21 |
purposes of printing out those documents
and reporting what those values are to the
| | 00:25 |
recipient.
So that's where I'd like to focus on and
| | 00:28 |
here and this movie is how to create
dimensions for the purposes of
| | 00:31 |
documentation.
So I'm in a file here called dimensioning
| | 00:34 |
and I'm in the enlarged dining room plan
view and I'm going to zoom in here near
| | 00:38 |
the top.
And begin adding my first few dimensions.
| | 00:43 |
So, here on the quick access tool bar, I'm
going to click the Aligned Dimension tool.
| | 00:47 |
And the Aligned Dimension tool is perhaps
our most versatile so we're going to stick
| | 00:50 |
with that.
But as you can see, there are lots of
| | 00:52 |
other options here on the ribbon so I
encourage you to look at those at a later
| | 00:55 |
time.
What I do want to focus on, though, is the
| | 00:58 |
options bar right here.
There are a few choices we want to
| | 01:02 |
consider.
The first option is whether or not you
| | 01:05 |
want the dimension to favor the wall
center lines or the wall faces.
| | 01:09 |
Now, I'm saying favor because even though
it might to initially highlight the center
| | 01:13 |
line.
You can always move your mouse slightly
| | 01:16 |
and press the Tab key to force it to give
you the face or the edge so that you
| | 01:20 |
always have the option to tab in and get
the point you want.
| | 01:25 |
The point of changing this setting, is,
this becomes your new default.
| | 01:30 |
So if I choose wall faces, for examples,
it will now favor the faces of the wall,
| | 01:33 |
and I would have to tab to get the center.
So, that's probably a little bit nicer for
| | 01:39 |
your documentation type dimensions.
Now, there are a couple other choices here
| | 01:43 |
that relate to the core of the wall.
Our project uses generic walls and so the
| | 01:48 |
core really doesn't come into play.
But if you're using walls that have a core
| | 01:53 |
material, like maybe there's concrete
block or studs and drywall, then you could
| | 01:57 |
use the core option to get it to dimension
to the faces of stud, for example, instead
| | 02:01 |
of the drywall.
But in this case we're going to stick with
| | 02:06 |
wall faces, and I want to make sure that
this setting is set to individual
| | 02:09 |
references.
We'll look at the other option under there
| | 02:12 |
shortly.
So, I'm going to highlight this face at
| | 02:15 |
the wall, and then this face of the
counter top and click it.
| | 02:18 |
Okay, click both of those and that gives
you the distance between those.
| | 02:21 |
Then I'll move to the next point.
And then I will pull all the way over to
| | 02:25 |
here to the inside face of this walll.
Now notice that I am able to select
| | 02:30 |
multiple reference points in the same
dimension string.
| | 02:33 |
You don't have to place individual
dimension strings, and when you are done
| | 02:37 |
the critical thing to do is you need to
make sure that your mouse is not on top of
| | 02:41 |
any geometry when you make your last click.
| | 02:45 |
Your last clcik is an empty white space.
And that determines where the dimension
| | 02:49 |
goes.
So, if you click on top of geometry it'll
| | 02:52 |
just keep adding dimension points.
So, we want to make sure that we're in
| | 02:55 |
empty space.
Let me do a couple more.
| | 02:57 |
I'm going to do this point down here, and
the other end of the counter here, and
| | 03:01 |
then I'll place it out here with a click.
And then maybe I want to see the size of
| | 03:06 |
this opening here into the kitchen.
So, I'll do the face of this wall, one
| | 03:10 |
side of the opening.
The other side of the opening, and maybe
| | 03:14 |
the other end of this wall.
It's a little busy over here to place it
| | 03:17 |
here, so I'm just going to pull it over
there and click.
| | 03:21 |
Lets start with those dimensions.
Let me click the Modify Tool to cancel out
| | 03:24 |
of there.
And let me zoom in just a little bit and
| | 03:26 |
see what we've got.
So you can see the various numbers that
| | 03:29 |
have been placed.
This one here is slightly on top of that
| | 03:32 |
wall there, so you can actually click the
dimension and just move it slightly.
| | 03:37 |
Now if it's moving too far, it's snapping
too far, just use the arrow key on your
| | 03:41 |
keyboard.
So I'm just going to nudge that down just
| | 03:44 |
one arrow, just to keep it from covering
up that wall right there.
| | 03:48 |
Now, look over here and I notice this two
foot eleven dimension.
| | 03:51 |
I'm not really happy with that and I'm
thinking, I think I would have rather have
| | 03:55 |
dimensioned to the opposite side of this
wall If you select the dimension, what you
| | 03:58 |
find is there's this Edit Witness Lines
button right here.
| | 04:02 |
You don't have to erase the dimension and
start over again.
| | 04:05 |
Just click Edit Witness Lines.
All of the existing witness lines that
| | 04:09 |
you've already chosen will highlight in
blue on the screen so you can see them
| | 04:13 |
there, in blue.
This one, this one and so on.
| | 04:16 |
And what you notice here is that this one
here is actually inside that counter top
| | 04:20 |
slightly.
So it's not even really in the right
| | 04:22 |
place.
So what I want to do, is, if you click an
| | 04:25 |
existing blue witness line, it will remove it.
| | 04:29 |
And if you click a new edge, it will add it.
| | 04:32 |
So with the edit witness lines tool, you
can add new witness lines.
| | 04:36 |
You can remove existing ones.
And then, here's the very important final
| | 04:39 |
click.
Make sure that, again, you're in empty
| | 04:42 |
white space when you click, because if
you're on Geometry, it'll keep adding and
| | 04:46 |
removing witness lines.
So I want to click out here in the middle
| | 04:50 |
of space somewhere, and that will complete
the operation.
| | 04:53 |
So I'm going to cancel out of there to
deselect everything.
| | 04:56 |
Let me zoom out a little bit, and let's
consider this wall over here.
| | 05:00 |
For this wall, I wanted to mention the
wall and the openings, but that would be,
| | 05:04 |
you know, a lot of clicks if I used the
same technique that we used a moment ago.
| | 05:09 |
So I'm going to click the dimension tool
And that's where this entire wall's
| | 05:12 |
feature could come into play.
This is a very powerful feature.
| | 05:16 |
Now if I click entire walls, a little
options button lights up next to it.
| | 05:21 |
So I'm going to click that options button.
And here you're going to see several
| | 05:24 |
options that are available for the entire
walls feature.
| | 05:27 |
If you don't check any of these options
here then it's just going to do the entire
| | 05:30 |
length of the wall but, I want to do a
little bit better than that.
| | 05:33 |
So, I'm going to check this box right here
for openings.
| | 05:37 |
Now, you can dimension all the openings in
the wall like all these windows Either to
| | 05:40 |
their centers, or their widths.
Now, I'm going to choose widths.
| | 05:44 |
I prefer that.
You can choose centers if you like.
| | 05:46 |
You can also include the intersecting walls.
| | 05:49 |
I'm not going to choose that in this case.
But I do have a grid line here and here,
| | 05:52 |
so I'm going to choose the intersecting grids.
| | 05:55 |
So let's see what those settings do for me.
| | 05:57 |
Let's click Okay.
The way that you use this tool is instead
| | 06:00 |
of now picking individual witness line
locations, you just highlight the wall
| | 06:03 |
that you want to dimension.
So I'm going to click this wall.
| | 06:07 |
Notice that that will create a whole bunch
of dimensions.
| | 06:11 |
And then I'm going to move out here to
place the dimension.
| | 06:14 |
Now one little word of caution here.
Watch what happens if I move too far to
| | 06:17 |
the right.
The dimension will disappear, so make sure
| | 06:22 |
that you click before it disappears, right.
| | 06:25 |
So I want to click inside of that mystery
boundary there, and I'm going to click
| | 06:28 |
right there.
The dimension will appear.
| | 06:33 |
I'm going to click the modify tool to
cancel out of the command.
| | 06:36 |
And why did the dimension disappear when
we got past a certain point?
| | 06:41 |
Well, that's tied back to the crop region
that's assigned to this view.
| | 06:44 |
So if you look down in your View Control
bar, we have this icon right here that
| | 06:47 |
shows or hides the crop regions.
So let's turn this one on to show the crop
| | 06:52 |
region.
And you see there's the crop region right
| | 06:54 |
there that we drew in the previous movie.
That crop region Cuts the model.
| | 07:00 |
That's the crop to the model itself.
Notice it doesn't affect the annotation.
| | 07:04 |
However, there's this dash line out here
that does affect the annotation.
| | 07:09 |
So the way this works is, if your
dimension moves out too far, okay, see it.
| | 07:16 |
It'll disappear.
And that's because it's now outside of
| | 07:19 |
this dashed boundary.
This little grip right here, will allow me
| | 07:23 |
to get it back again if I pulled it too far.
| | 07:26 |
So, your two remedies to dealing with the
situation are to either just keep the
| | 07:30 |
dimension inside this dash line or just
Widen that dash line.
| | 07:35 |
Now I'm going to go ahead and turn off
this crop region, and I'm going to move
| | 07:38 |
these dimensions just a little bit closer
to the model again, like so.
| | 07:43 |
Let me zoom in a little bit here and as
you can see the text is a little bit
| | 07:45 |
cluttered here.
And I have a couple remedies to that.
| | 07:49 |
I can select the Dimension, and then these
small little grips will appear on each
| | 07:53 |
piece of text.
I can drag.
| | 07:56 |
That piece of text out and it will create
a little leader pointing back to the
| | 07:59 |
dimension.
That's one solution or the other solution
| | 08:03 |
is to select the dimension and over here
on the properties palette I can edit its
| | 08:07 |
type.
Now, when I click this button it will open
| | 08:11 |
up the type settings dialogue for these dimensions.
| | 08:14 |
I'm going to scroll down And you could see
here next to Units Format, this big button
| | 08:19 |
that shows me the format of the Default units.
| | 08:23 |
I'm going to click that button.
The default behavior is to use the project
| | 08:27 |
settings from this project.
Now, you could cancel out of here and go
| | 08:32 |
change the project settings, but what I'm
going to do instead is uncheck this to let
| | 08:36 |
this dimension override the project settings.
| | 08:39 |
And the only override that I want to
enable is to turn on this check box right
| | 08:43 |
here and suppress 0 feet.
I'll click okay twice.
| | 08:48 |
And you'll see that now these six inch
values do not display zero feet in front
| | 08:51 |
of them.
And so they fit a little bit nicer within
| | 08:54 |
those witness lines.
One last thing.
| | 08:57 |
Let's say that you're working with a firm
that's overseas.
| | 09:00 |
And you want to show both the imperial
dimensions and the metric equivalents.
| | 09:05 |
If I go to edit type again.
That's in the same general area of the
| | 09:09 |
dialogue.
Right here you can see that alternate
| | 09:11 |
units is an option.
Now, it's currently set to none.
| | 09:14 |
So I'm just going to open this little list
of choices here, and I'll put it below the
| | 09:19 |
imperial value.
It's going to default to millimeters by
| | 09:22 |
default.
I'm fine with that.
| | 09:24 |
I'm going to click okay.
And now you can see that I have the metric
| | 09:28 |
equivalent beneath each of my imperial values.
| | 09:32 |
So, there's a lot of different ways that
you can approach the dimensioning of your
| | 09:35 |
floor plans and of course, when you're
getting your documents ready for printing
| | 09:39 |
and presentation, dimensions are a
critical part of any architectural
| | 09:42 |
document set.
| | 09:45 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating tags| 00:00 |
In this movie, I'd like to look at tags.
Tags are an important part of any document
| | 00:04 |
set.
And we use them for a variety of purposes
| | 00:07 |
to call out the various doors, the
windows, wall types, and so on.
| | 00:11 |
And the file I'm in right now is called
tags and I'm in the Level 1 Floor Plan.
| | 00:16 |
And currently there are room tags for each
of the rooms in this file.
| | 00:20 |
And those came in as we created the rooms automatically.
| | 00:23 |
But for the other objects like the doors
and the windows, and so on.
| | 00:26 |
There aren't any tags yet, and adding them
is a pretty simple affair.
| | 00:30 |
Now we can locate the Tag button on the
Quick Access toolbar, so it's right up
| | 00:33 |
here.
And it's actually called Tag by category
| | 00:36 |
and the reason it's called that is if you
move your mouse around the screen Revit
| | 00:39 |
will actually change the shape of the tag
that you're using, the kind of tag you're
| | 00:42 |
using, depending on the category of object
under your cursor.
| | 00:47 |
So here I'm giving a diamond-shaped tag.
Here I'm getting more of an oval-shaped
| | 00:51 |
tag.
Over here I would get a hexagon tag.
| | 00:53 |
So you can see that each of the objects
that are under my cursor, it knows what
| | 00:57 |
kind of tag to give me.
And the way it knows that is this button
| | 01:01 |
right here.
If we click that, you can see these are
| | 01:04 |
all the tags that currently loaded in your project.
| | 01:07 |
So if you try and click on a object that
does not have a tag, like a ceiling or a
| | 01:10 |
curtain panel in this case, then Revit
will just simply prompt you to load an
| | 01:13 |
appropriate tag.
I'm going to cancel out of here, and the
| | 01:17 |
last setting I want to look at here on
this Options bar is the leader option.
| | 01:22 |
If you were tagging your walls, you'd
probably want the leader.
| | 01:25 |
I'm going to go ahead and click right there.
| | 01:26 |
Now, we'll talk about why that value is
empty in just a moment.
| | 01:29 |
If you were tagging your doors, you
probably would not want the leader.
| | 01:33 |
So I would uncheck that and then when I
click the door, the tag would be
| | 01:35 |
associated directly with the door or maybe
with the window and so on.
| | 01:40 |
So you can see that you might want that
leader option to be on or off, depending
| | 01:43 |
on the kind of tag that you're talking about.
| | 01:47 |
Now let me cancel out of the command for a moment.
| | 01:48 |
This door already knew that it was door
number 3.
| | 01:51 |
But notice that this wall did not fill in
any designation.
| | 01:55 |
That's simply because the designation
hasn't been filled in yet for this wall.
| | 01:58 |
So what I'm actually going to do is go
back to Tag by Category, turn on the
| | 02:02 |
leader, let me tag a couple more walls.
Now these walls are all the same type.
| | 02:08 |
This wall is a different type.
Right here.
| | 02:11 |
And let me show you how to input that value.
| | 02:14 |
So I'm going to select this wall right
here, and choose the Edit Type command
| | 02:17 |
here on the Properties palette.
Now, the value that that tag is looking
| | 02:22 |
for is this value right here, the type mark.
| | 02:25 |
And as you can see, it's currently empty,
which explains why the tags are all empty.
| | 02:29 |
Now, just to kind of clarify a little bit
here, tags can look at any property of the
| | 02:34 |
object.
And you can see that we have a long list
| | 02:36 |
of properties to choose from.
You could make a tag that showed you the
| | 02:39 |
cost of the wall or the fire rating of the
wall or the description of the wall.
| | 02:43 |
In this case, this tag is looking at the
type mark, and all I have to do is type in
| | 02:47 |
a designation here.
I'll put in A1.
| | 02:50 |
Click OK.
Not only will it fill in here, but you'll
| | 02:53 |
see it fill there and there as well.
This one did not fill in because this is
| | 02:56 |
just a different type wall.
These were generic 8-inch walls.
| | 03:01 |
This is a generic 5-inch wall.
So to get that one to fill in, I would
| | 03:04 |
just have to repeat the process and give
it a type designation as well.
| | 03:08 |
(SOUND) And when I click OK, it would fill in.
| | 03:11 |
Furthermore, if I came back and added a
new tag to another wall of that type,
| | 03:15 |
you'll see that it will have the same designation.
| | 03:20 |
So once you've filled in the type
designation, the rest will take care of
| | 03:22 |
itself.
Now, these tags are actually looking at
| | 03:25 |
the instance value of the door.
So this, is door number 3.
| | 03:32 |
This is door number 4.
So the tag knows whether or not it should
| | 03:37 |
look at the individual value of the door
or the global value of the door.
| | 03:42 |
Let's put another tag here, turn off the
leader, tag this door.
| | 03:45 |
You can see that it automatically goes to
door number 4.
| | 03:48 |
Now, I'm stopping the command because I
want to show you one other command for
| | 03:51 |
tagging here.
You don't have to tag each of your objects
| | 03:55 |
individually one at a time.
That can get a little tedious.
| | 03:59 |
We've got several doors here in this plan,
and if you look at your Annotate tab,
| | 04:03 |
here's that tag by category button we were
just using.
| | 04:07 |
Again, you could find it here as well.
But right next to it is Tag All.
| | 04:11 |
Now, the way this command works is
actually Tag All Not Tagged.
| | 04:15 |
So it's going to tag all of the elements
of whatever category you select, that
| | 04:18 |
haven't already been tagged.
So, in this case, these two doors have
| | 04:22 |
been tagged.
I won't get duplicate tags, but all the
| | 04:24 |
doors here and here that haven't been
tagged yet, all I have to do is click OK,
| | 04:27 |
and it will add a tag to all those missing doors.
| | 04:31 |
Tag on that tag is probably the fastest
way to add a bunch of tags to a floor
| | 04:35 |
plan.
Now, I'm going to show you one last
| | 04:38 |
example.
I'm going to go back up to my enlarged
| | 04:40 |
dining room plan, and maybe I want to
start tagging the chairs and tables in
| | 04:44 |
this plan.
To do that, I could use the same exact
| | 04:48 |
command, tag by category, and highlight
one of these objects.
| | 04:52 |
The trouble is, when I do, it's going to
say you don't have a furniture tag loaded.
| | 04:56 |
So this is what I was talking about a
moment ago when we clicked on the tags
| | 04:59 |
button and saw which tags were currently
loaded in the project.
| | 05:03 |
So all you have to do is say yes here, and
it will take you to the load command, and
| | 05:06 |
allow you to find an appropriate tag.
So there's an annotations folder right
| | 05:11 |
here and then in architectural folder.
And then, finally, there is a furniture
| | 05:15 |
tag right there.
So I'm going to open that up and now when
| | 05:18 |
I click on the table, it will show me an
appropriate tag.
| | 05:23 |
And as you can see it works the same way.
You can also see however, right, cancel
| | 05:27 |
out there and zoom in a little, that those
tags are currently empty.
| | 05:31 |
Well, it's the same issue that we saw with
the wall tag.
| | 05:33 |
If you select any one of these tables and
it doesn't matter which one I pick, they
| | 05:36 |
are all the same.
Go to Edit Type and come down here.
| | 05:41 |
You can fill in a type mark designation.
So I'm just going to call these T1, click
| | 05:46 |
OK, and you see that they're now all T1.
That brings up an interesting issue here.
| | 05:52 |
You may decide that you don't want to tag
in the same way that the tag was built
| | 05:57 |
for.
In other words, the doors were tagging
| | 06:01 |
individual door numbers. Right?
| | 06:03 |
So this is door number 1.
This is door number 2.
| | 06:05 |
The walls were saying, this is a type A wall.
| | 06:07 |
This is a type B wall.
The tables are doing the same thing.
| | 06:09 |
This is a type T1 table.
Now, if you want to actually number the
| | 06:13 |
individual tables, if I select this table.
Scroll down.
| | 06:18 |
It has a mark value as well.
It's currently empty, but I could fill
| | 06:21 |
that in.
I could say this is table 1, (SOUND) and
| | 06:24 |
this is table 2, and this is table 3.
The trouble is, the tag that I have is not
| | 06:29 |
looking at that value.
So if you want that tag to look at that
| | 06:32 |
value, what you'd actually have to do is
edit that family and modify it.
| | 06:37 |
Now I'm going to select this tag.
I'm going to click edit family.
| | 06:41 |
That takes me into the tag itself.
I'm going to select this piece of text
| | 06:45 |
right here which is actually called a label.
| | 06:48 |
And then over here on the Properties
palette I'm going to edit it.
| | 06:51 |
And it's looking for the type mark as we
saw back in the project.
| | 06:56 |
I'm going to remove that.
And in its place, I'm going to take the
| | 07:00 |
mark here and add that over.
And that's all we have to do to basically
| | 07:04 |
change this tag from a type tag to an
instance tag.
| | 07:08 |
Best practice says you ought to go to the
big R here and do a Save As, (SOUND) and
| | 07:11 |
give this a new name.
Now, you can put it in your library
| | 07:14 |
folder, which is where it went to by
default, but I'm going to put it in my
| | 07:17 |
exercise files.
And I'll just call this furniture instance
| | 07:23 |
tag to distinguish it.
Click here to load it back into my
| | 07:27 |
project.
That takes me back to this level one floor
| | 07:31 |
plan.
Let me go back to the enlarged dining
| | 07:33 |
room.
I'm going to select with Ctrl key each of
| | 07:36 |
the existing tags that I already have.
Come up here to the drop down, and you'll
| | 07:42 |
now see that I have a furniture instance
tag, and I can swap it out, and now it
| | 07:45 |
tells me that I have table 1, 2, and 3.
So if you don't like the tag the way it
| | 07:50 |
was originally configured, it's real easy
to change it.
| | 07:53 |
But, really, the best thing to do is to
save a copy, so you actually have both and
| | 07:56 |
you can switch between the two easily.
Tags are necessary part of any
| | 08:00 |
documentation set.
And as you can see the process of adding
| | 08:03 |
tags here in Revit is fairly straightforward.
| | 08:05 |
You can tag with the time category or you
can use tag all and make sure it's in one
| | 08:11 |
step.
| | 08:13 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding a schedule view| 00:00 |
In this movie, we're going to look at Schedules.
| | 00:02 |
Now, Schedules in Revit can be used for a
variety of purposes.
| | 00:05 |
We certainly can create the traditional
door schedule or room finish schedule, or
| | 00:08 |
any of those sort of tables and reports
that you might typically see on a document
| | 00:11 |
set.
Now, the big difference is, in traditional
| | 00:14 |
hand drafting, you would be creating that
schedule manually and painstakingly by
| | 00:17 |
laying out a bunch of lines and text, and
manually coordinating all that data that
| | 00:21 |
was contained in there.
In Revit, a schedule is a live view of the
| | 00:27 |
model.
So you just simply ask Revit to go look
| | 00:29 |
through your model for a certain category
of information and it will list out all
| | 00:33 |
those items for you in a table automatically.
| | 00:37 |
Furthermore, the information is a direct
live link back to the model.
| | 00:40 |
So if you make any change in the schedule,
the model updates, an vice versa.
| | 00:45 |
If you change the model the schedule updates.
| | 00:47 |
It's a live view.
Now we've seen a few examples of this in
| | 00:50 |
some of the earlier movies, and if we look
here on the project browser and I scroll
| | 00:54 |
down just a little bit.
There's a schedules and quantities branch
| | 00:58 |
here and we've got a door schedule, a room
schedule, and a window schedule already.
| | 01:02 |
Now if you open some of these, you can see
it's got every door listed, complete with
| | 01:05 |
the sizes.
And I've even gone in and started filling
| | 01:08 |
in some information like the material and
the type and so on.
| | 01:11 |
Now, here's a room schedule.
Same kind of thing.
| | 01:14 |
All the rooms that we created in previous
movie are listed.
| | 01:17 |
And I started filling in the finished information.
| | 01:20 |
Now I'm going to close both of these with
the x right here.
| | 01:22 |
Both of those schedules would be perfectly
suitable to put on a sheet and print along
| | 01:25 |
with your document set.
.And usually most projects are going to
| | 01:29 |
require Schedules like that.
But we can use schedules for a variety of
| | 01:32 |
other purposes as well.
Because the schedule is a live view of the
| | 01:36 |
model, we can use that as a querying tool
that asks questions of our model and get
| | 01:39 |
important information and feedback.
So, for example, if I wanted to discuss
| | 01:45 |
with my building owner just how much
seating I have in this dining room, I
| | 01:47 |
could use a schedule as a tool to help me
determine that.
| | 01:51 |
Now, I'm looking at the Enlarged Dining
Room Plan here, and I have all of the
| | 01:54 |
tables, and some of them are tagged already.
| | 01:57 |
And what I want to do is create a list of
all of those tables and chairs.
| | 02:00 |
So, I'm going to go to the View tab, click
on the schedule drop-down, and choose
| | 02:03 |
schedules and quantities.
I have my list filtered by architectural
| | 02:07 |
categories just to make sure that
architecture is checked.
| | 02:11 |
It doesn't really matter what the other
checkboxes say.
| | 02:14 |
And scroll down here and make sure that
you choose Furniture.
| | 02:17 |
That's the category we are interested in.
I am going to accept all the other
| | 02:21 |
defaults in Furniture Schedule and so on.
(SOUND) Click OK, and that takes me to the
| | 02:25 |
Schedule Properties dialog.
Here I can choose from this list of
| | 02:28 |
available fields which fields I want to
include in the schedule.
| | 02:32 |
I'd like to know what level the
furniture's on, what its family and type
| | 02:35 |
name is.
So I'll add that.
| | 02:37 |
(SOUND) How many items I have and any
comments they might have.
| | 02:42 |
So I'll just keep this a really simple schedule.
| | 02:43 |
So I just added those four fields.
Let's click OK and see what that gives us.
| | 02:48 |
And now I have this really long list.
If you scroll through here, you can see,
| | 02:52 |
there are quite a few items in this file.
I'm going to come over here and make this
| | 02:56 |
a little more legible, so between B and C
here, I'm going to click and drag.
| | 03:01 |
Make that column a little bit wider,
(SOUND) so that I can read the full name.
| | 03:05 |
Now, you'll notice that, I start with a
table then I get some chairs, then another
| | 03:08 |
table then some more chairs.
So it might make more sense if I, started
| | 03:12 |
sorting and grouping this schedule a
little bit.
| | 03:15 |
Look over here at the Properties palette.
Scroll down.
| | 03:17 |
And you're going to see a series of edit
buttons available here.
| | 03:19 |
Next to Sorting and Grouping, I'm going to
click Edit.
| | 03:24 |
That will open up a dialog that allows me
to sort by up to four criteria.
| | 03:28 |
Now, the criteria that are available here
are the fields that you added back on the
| | 03:32 |
Fields tab.
So, you can only sort by fields you've
| | 03:35 |
actually added to your schedule and, in
this case, I'm going to choose family and
| | 03:37 |
type.
Let's click OK and see what that gives me.
| | 03:41 |
So, then I have the result of grouping all
the family names together which is a
| | 03:43 |
little bit nicer.
But you can see that I've got items
| | 03:47 |
interspersed between Level 1 and level 2.
So now that I think of it, it might make a
| | 03:51 |
little more sense to go back to sorting
and grouping, and change this first
| | 03:55 |
criteria to level, and then maybe do a
second criteria for the family and type.
| | 04:01 |
Now, while I'm here, each criteria can
have a header.
| | 04:05 |
And you can insert a blank line to give it
a little bit more breathing room.
| | 04:08 |
So I'm going to do a header here, and a
blank line here.
| | 04:10 |
And let's click OK.
And you'll now see the word Level appear
| | 04:14 |
here.
And then over here is that blank line and
| | 04:18 |
the word Level.
Now, I see the word Level.
| | 04:21 |
I don't necessarily need to see it again.
So, actually, if I go to the Formatting
| | 04:25 |
tab.
I can take that Level field and I can make
| | 04:28 |
it hidden.
When I do that and I click OK, it will
| | 04:31 |
remove the redundant Level field and it
will just leave the header.
| | 04:35 |
So the header stays, but I don't see that
information over and over again.
| | 04:39 |
I still, if I look at the Count column, I
still see a count of 1 next to every item.
| | 04:44 |
But it probably makes a little bit more
sense to group and sort these even a
| | 04:47 |
little further.
So let's go back to grouping and sorting.
| | 04:51 |
And what I want to do is turn off Itemize
Every Instance.
| | 04:55 |
Now in addition to that, I'm going to turn
on Grand Totals here, and let's click OK.
| | 05:00 |
And now the entire list collapses down and
I get a full count of each item but I only
| | 05:05 |
get each item listed once.
So this is a much easier list to look at
| | 05:10 |
and digest, few more finishing touches.
Let's go back to sorting and grouping.
| | 05:14 |
I can add a subtotal, on any of my sort criteria.
| | 05:18 |
So per level, I can ask how many pieces I have.
| | 05:21 |
Let's do totals only for that.
Under Formatting, these are numericalo, it
| | 05:26 |
might be nice to take the count field and
right align it.
| | 05:31 |
And then, if you check this box, Calculate
Totals, that's what will give you a
| | 05:35 |
subtotal here and here.
So, let's click OK on all of those changes
| | 05:39 |
and see what we got.
So I have 100 items on the first floor.
| | 05:43 |
I have 99 on the second floor and a grand
total of 199.
| | 05:46 |
This is certainly a very useful schedule
now that would allow my building owner to
| | 05:49 |
know just how many pieces of furniture
they might want to order.
| | 05:53 |
Maybe my building owner would like to know
how many people they can seat in the
| | 05:57 |
restaurant.
So to do that, we could duplicate this
| | 06:00 |
schedule and vary the way that it's set up.
| | 06:03 |
That will be the subject of the next
movie.
| | 06:05 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing a schedule view| 00:00 |
In this movie, we'll continue our look at
schedules by going a little deeper and
| | 00:03 |
customizing the furniture schedule that we
completed in the previous movie.
| | 00:08 |
So in the previous movie, we created this
furniture schedule, which essentially just
| | 00:10 |
gives us a count of items that we have in
our project.
| | 00:13 |
And so this could be useful to help our
building owner know how many pieces they
| | 00:16 |
have to order.
So perhaps the building owner has come
| | 00:20 |
back to us and said well what I'd really
like to know is how many people I can seat
| | 00:22 |
in my restaurant.
The wrinkle there is that we can't just
| | 00:25 |
simply say well you know jsut count the
number of seating objects you have.
| | 00:29 |
That would work for the Broyer chair,
because you can only seat one person per
| | 00:31 |
chair, but what about the booth seating?
The booth seating's a little bit more of a
| | 00:35 |
challenge.
Because you can sit more than one person
| | 00:38 |
on each of those booths.
So furthermore, we can't just use the
| | 00:41 |
totals in the schedule, because the
schedule also includes the tables.
| | 00:45 |
So there's a few things we need to do.
We need to get the tables off of this
| | 00:48 |
schedule, and have the schedule be just
the chairs.
| | 00:51 |
And then we need to find some way in order
to indicate how many people each of those
| | 00:55 |
booths can seat.
So let's look at doing that here with this
| | 00:59 |
example.
I made a file called Customizing
| | 01:02 |
Schedules, and of course we've got this
furniture schedule open at the moment, and
| | 01:05 |
you could find that down here on the
project browser.
| | 01:08 |
Now the first step will be to simply
duplicate the schedule that we have.
| | 01:12 |
So I'm going to right click on the
furniture schedule and under duplicate
| | 01:15 |
view choose duplicate.
That will create a copy which I will Right
| | 01:20 |
click and rename, and I'm going to call
this Seating Schedule.
| | 01:25 |
With that seating schedule active let's
begin modifying it.
| | 01:28 |
So the first thing we want to do is filter
out any of the tables.
| | 01:31 |
If you look here on the Properties
palette, you'll notice that among the five
| | 01:34 |
items that we can edit Filter is one of
the choices.
| | 01:37 |
So I'm going to choose the Edit button
right next to filter, and you can filter
| | 01:40 |
by up to four criteria.
Now the criteria that are available here
| | 01:44 |
are the same fields that you added, that
we were able to sort and group on.
| | 01:48 |
So, if you recall that over here we had
our fields that are part of the schedule.
| | 01:53 |
Those are the same items that appear here.
Now, there are few limitations.
| | 01:57 |
Notice that family and type is not on the
list, nor is the count.
| | 02:01 |
Well, you can't filter by the count, and
you can't filter by the family and type
| | 02:05 |
name.
Revit shows you the names that are
| | 02:08 |
available to filter on.
We can filter by some of the other fields,
| | 02:12 |
but in order to do that, we have to add them.
| | 02:14 |
So our job is to find a field that's a
good candidate to filter on, that would
| | 02:17 |
give us just the chairs or just the seating.
| | 02:20 |
If we look at our available fields here,
there's a lot of choices.
| | 02:23 |
But what I'm going to do is choose the
type mark.
| | 02:26 |
The reason I'm going to choose the type
mark is because we get to input our type
| | 02:30 |
marks.
And what I've started to do is label the
| | 02:33 |
type marks for each of our items, starting
with the letter S.
| | 02:37 |
So let's go ahead and add the type mark.
I'm going to move it up to the top of the
| | 02:41 |
list, and then let's go over here to filter.
| | 02:44 |
Notice that type mark is now on the list.
Now, when you choose your filter criteria,
| | 02:50 |
over here you can then be more specific.
What about the type mark?
| | 02:54 |
Do you want it to equal something, not
equal something, contain something?
| | 02:58 |
What I'm going to do is say it has to
begin with the letter s.
| | 03:02 |
Now this is case sensitive so, I'm putting
uppercase S.
| | 03:05 |
Now, let's click Okay, and see what that does.
| | 03:07 |
What I've begun doing is inputting the
letter s in front of the type designation
| | 03:12 |
for all of my seating families.
So, I've done that with many of the booth
| | 03:17 |
seating but, I still have a few to do.
So, at the moment the schedule is
| | 03:21 |
filtering too much.
So now what I need to do is go back out to
| | 03:24 |
my model, and add type designations
beginning with the letter S to the other
| | 03:27 |
items that I want to appear here on the schedule.
| | 03:31 |
So let's go back to my Enlarged Dining
Room Plan.
| | 03:35 |
Let's zoom in a little bit here, and I
could hunt around and select each object,
| | 03:41 |
and go to Edit Type.
And look for a designation and if it's
| | 03:46 |
there fine, leave it alone, and if it's
not there I could type it in.
| | 03:50 |
But that's kind of a tedious way to do it.
Notice that this one had a designation
| | 03:53 |
already.
This one doesn't actually have a
| | 03:55 |
designation already, so I could do it that way.
| | 03:58 |
But it's kind of the slow way.
Let's add tags instead, because if the tag
| | 04:01 |
comes in empty, then I know I need a
designation, and if it comes in with a
| | 04:04 |
value, then I know it's done already.
So you recall from a previous movie that
| | 04:09 |
we learned how to add tags and we learned
how to do it quickly.
| | 04:12 |
The command was here on the Annotate tab,
and it's the Tag All command.
| | 04:17 |
So when I choose this command we get the
Tag All not tagged.
| | 04:21 |
I'm going to tag all the objects in this
current view, and notice I have several
| | 04:24 |
choices for furniture tags.
Now, the furniture tags instance is the
| | 04:27 |
ones that we're using on the tables here.
Those were the ones we created in the
| | 04:31 |
previous movie.
What I want to do is make sure I'm using
| | 04:34 |
the Type tag, because we're sorting our
schedule by the type mark.
| | 04:38 |
So that's this tag right here.
I'm going to use the boxed version.
| | 04:41 |
And I'm going to click okay.
Notice that a blank tag appears on all the
| | 04:44 |
items that still need a designation.
Now it looks like a daunting task, but it
| | 04:49 |
turns out that if I zoom in here, it's
really only two items.
| | 04:53 |
I'm going to click right on this tag.
Notice the question mark.
| | 04:57 |
I'll click in there, SB4, seating booth 4.
Press Enter, and then Revit will ask me if
| | 05:03 |
it's okay to apply this to all instances
of this type, and I'm going to say yes,
| | 05:07 |
that's exactly what I want.
Notice that all of these fill in as SB4.
| | 05:14 |
I'm going to do the same thing right here.
This is going to be SC1, seating chair
| | 05:17 |
one.
Enter, and again I'll click Yes, and that
| | 05:22 |
fills in every chair.
So, two edits and I'm done.
| | 05:27 |
If I go back to my schedule, seating
schedule, open it up.
| | 05:33 |
Notice that I now have more items on the list.
| | 05:36 |
Now, you might be tempted to say, well
that's it.
| | 05:38 |
We're done.
Here's 82 on this floor, 80 on this floor.
| | 05:41 |
We can seat 162 people.
But, not quite.
| | 05:44 |
This is just counting the number of
physical seating objects, it's not
| | 05:47 |
counting how many people each of these can accommodate.
| | 05:51 |
So we need to add another field here that
allows us to designate how many people
| | 05:56 |
each seating item can accommodate.
Now, with the Breuer chair, naturally,
| | 06:01 |
it's going to be one per, but with the
booths, it's going to vary.
| | 06:04 |
So, let's take a look at how we can do that.
| | 06:07 |
I'm going to scroll down here.
I'm going to click the edit button next to
| | 06:10 |
fields.
And right here we can add our own custom
| | 06:14 |
parameter, right here in the middle.
I'm going to click Add Parameter and type
| | 06:18 |
in a name for this custom parameter,
Number of persons.
| | 06:22 |
For the type of parameter, I want to
change that to an integer.
| | 06:26 |
An integer is just a whole number, and so
I'll be able to put in one, or two, or
| | 06:30 |
three, and really important, I want to
make sure this parameter is a type-based
| | 06:34 |
parameter.
We don't want an instance because then
| | 06:38 |
you'd literally have to input this value
for each and every chair.
| | 06:41 |
That would sort of defeat the purpose.
What I want to do is do it at the type
| | 06:44 |
level.
Click Okay, Okay again.
| | 06:47 |
That puts the number of persons fields in
here at the end.
| | 06:52 |
And now all I have to do is go through
these 5 fields here and input the values.
| | 06:56 |
And it will be Applied to all instances of
those chairs.
| | 07:00 |
For the 36 inch long booth I can seat one person.
| | 07:05 |
When I enter Revit will tell me that it
has to apply to all instances that type.
| | 07:10 |
So, I'll click Okay.
The 60 inch booth can accommodate three.
| | 07:13 |
Okay.
The Broyer chair can accommodate one.
| | 07:19 |
Okay notice that fills in on both floors,
because it's the same broil chair.
| | 07:23 |
And then finally the 48 inch booth can
accommodate too.
| | 07:27 |
So just like that I've put in all the
values that I need to put in.
| | 07:31 |
But I now need to total up those numbers.
So this is how many each chair can
| | 07:37 |
accommodate.
Now, we just need to create the total.
| | 07:41 |
Let's click over here on the formatting button.
| | 07:45 |
We're going to select the number of persons.
| | 07:47 |
I'm going to right-align it, and I'm
going to tell it to calculate totals.
| | 07:53 |
When I do that, and I click Okay, I'll get
the grand total number of persons I can
| | 07:58 |
seat on each floor and the grand total for
the entire building.
| | 08:04 |
Notice that these totals now are multiplying.
| | 08:07 |
Previously this said 3; it's 3 times 7.
So we have 7 of these benches, each one
| | 08:13 |
accommodates 3 people.
We've got a total of 21 persons, so it's
| | 08:17 |
working the way we expect.
So now we've got a report that we can go
| | 08:20 |
and have a discussion with our building owner.
| | 08:23 |
And with confidence we can tell him your
restaurant can accommodate 184 people.
| | 08:28 |
So you can see that Schedules in Revit are
not just about what you put on your
| | 08:32 |
document sheets.
Schedules are an incredibly powerful tool
| | 08:36 |
that allow you to query your model and get
really useful information out.
| | 08:40 |
If you've heard the term building
information modeling, this is the i in
| | 08:44 |
BIM, this is the information part, and
it's a very powerful part of Revit.
| | 08:50 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a construction detail| 00:00 |
In this movie I'd like to look at the
detailing process in Revit.
| | 00:03 |
Not everything that you create in your
Revit project will be part of the model.
| | 00:07 |
There are many advantages of building
model elements because they appear in
| | 00:10 |
multiple views.
And when you change them, they change
| | 00:12 |
everywhere.
But not everything needs to show in all
| | 00:15 |
views.
And so, there are certainly plenty of
| | 00:18 |
instances where we have items that are
considered construction details that
| | 00:22 |
really only show in one place.
And the quantity of information that's
| | 00:26 |
displayed in those views is at a level of
detail that makes it impractical to
| | 00:29 |
consider modeling all those elements.
Consider things like bolts and screws and
| | 00:35 |
flashing and mortar joints and clips and hangers.
| | 00:40 |
None of these items would really give you
much benefit to adding them
| | 00:43 |
3-dimensionally in your model.
They would just simply serve to weigh down
| | 00:47 |
the model and impede performance, without
really adding a whole lot of benefit.
| | 00:52 |
So at some point you need to stop modeling
and begin drafting.
| | 00:57 |
And essentially, what we do in a Revit
process is we do a hybrid.
| | 01:02 |
So it usually starts by building a view,
an enlarged view of a certain area that
| | 01:06 |
will give us a portion of our model to
look at.
| | 01:09 |
And then, on top of that view of the model
we'll add additional drafting components
| | 01:14 |
to complete the detail.
I'd like to show you a quick example of
| | 01:18 |
that here in this prep station.
I'm in the detailing file and I'm in the
| | 01:21 |
Level 1 floor plan.
And the first step is to create that view,
| | 01:24 |
that enlarged view that we're going to
then add the detailing to, so I'm going to
| | 01:27 |
come up here to the quick access toolbar.
I'm going to click the Section tool and
| | 01:31 |
then over here on the Properties palette,
it defaults to a building section.
| | 01:35 |
I just want to open that up and change
that to detail.
| | 01:38 |
And I'm going to click two points.
I'll click over here to the right, and
| | 01:41 |
drag through the counter top to the left.
That will create a very small little
| | 01:46 |
detail view.
I'm going to deselect it and here's a
| | 01:48 |
shortcut to open that view.
You can just take this little bubble that
| | 01:51 |
appears here and double-click it and that
will open up the view.
| | 01:55 |
Now the crop region needs a little bit of
fine tuning here.
| | 01:57 |
So let me adjust that a little bit so I
can see the full height of my detail and
| | 02:01 |
I'll actually narrow it up just a touch
and I don't need to see quite that much
| | 02:05 |
down below.
So I'll shorten it there as well.
| | 02:11 |
Now, the next thing I want to look at is
the scale.
| | 02:12 |
This section cut got created at 8 inch
equals a foot.
| | 02:16 |
And that's way too small for a detail.
So I'm going to open up the list of scales
| | 02:19 |
here.
And I'm going to enlarge this scale to 1
| | 02:22 |
and a half inch equals a foot.
And that will adjust the view that you see
| | 02:27 |
on screen here.
You can see of course the level annotation
| | 02:30 |
got a lot smaller.
This gives me the basic starting point.
| | 02:33 |
I have my low height wall here and my
countertop here.
| | 02:36 |
And now what I want to do is start adding
detailed components on top of that.
| | 02:41 |
Now, the way that I do that is I come over
here to the Annotate tab.
| | 02:44 |
And there's a component tool here on the
Detailing panel, it's just called Detail
| | 02:48 |
Component.
If yours doesn't show here, there's a
| | 02:51 |
little drop-down.
And it might show Repeating Detail or
| | 02:54 |
Legend Component; just make sure you're
choosing Detail Component from this list.
| | 03:00 |
This behaves much like the 3D component did.
| | 03:02 |
Over here on the list, we have a series of
choices, so you could see that there are
| | 03:05 |
several detailed components already loaded
into this file, and I'm going to start
| | 03:08 |
with a couple that are already here.
There's a light gauge metal channel and a
| | 03:14 |
light gauge metal stud.
So I'm going to choose the 3 and 5 8ths
| | 03:18 |
inch Light Gauge Metal channel and bring
that in, I'm going to zoom in down here at
| | 03:22 |
the bottom, notice that its going vertically.
| | 03:26 |
I'll just tap my space bar to rotate it 90
degrees and then I want to line it up with
| | 03:30 |
the center of the wall and just sort of
place it down here towards the bottom.
| | 03:36 |
I'm going to zoom back out.
Drag to the top, zoom in, tap the space
| | 03:41 |
bar twice and place another one up here at
the top.
| | 03:47 |
Then I'm going to come over here, change
to the light gauge metal stud three and
| | 03:51 |
five eighths.
That shape changes slightly.
| | 03:56 |
Let's zoom out again, pan over here, when
I come in here, tap the space bar and get
| | 04:00 |
it lined up with the center and about near
the top of the counter top.
| | 04:07 |
Tap the space bar one more time and do
another one right here.
| | 04:11 |
Now, you see I'm having a hard time
getting it lined up, I'm going to get it
| | 04:14 |
close by, like so.
I'm going to click the Modify tool and
| | 04:18 |
cancel out of the command.
Let me zoom in here just a little bit.
| | 04:22 |
We have this wonderful tool on the Modify
tab called the Align Command.
| | 04:26 |
So, I'm going to go to Modify, click on
the Align tool right here right about the
| | 04:29 |
Move command, and what you do is you pick twice.
| | 04:33 |
The first point is your point of reference.
| | 04:35 |
So, I want this stud to line up with this stud.
| | 04:38 |
So, my point of reference is going to be
the side of the one I want to line up
| | 04:40 |
with.
That's this guy.
| | 04:43 |
Then you pick the edge of the one that you
want to align.
| | 04:47 |
And you see now that those two are
perfectly aligned.
| | 04:50 |
Let's do it again I want to line up here
and then this guy.
| | 04:55 |
And they both move into perfect alignment.
So the Align tool is a great way to move
| | 04:59 |
and or rotate objects into perfect
alignment with some other object that you
| | 05:03 |
already have.
So those are the studs.
| | 05:07 |
Now, I want to add the drywall.
Now, if I go back to the Annotate tab and
| | 05:10 |
click the Component button, we don't have
a drywall component currently loaded in
| | 05:14 |
this project.
Now, these component families that we're
| | 05:19 |
adding are actually just 2D detail
component families.
| | 05:22 |
They behave a lot like the other
components we were adding, except that
| | 05:24 |
these are view specific.
They only occur in this View.
| | 05:28 |
If you open up any other view of the
project, you won't see these objects.
| | 05:32 |
And they're 2-dimensional.
But there's a whole bunch of them that are
| | 05:35 |
included with the software.
So I can access those ones that are
| | 05:38 |
included right here on the Load Family,
just like we did with the 3D components.
| | 05:44 |
Here in the US Imperial Library, there's a
detail items folder.
| | 05:47 |
I'll open that up.
And then there's several subfolders
| | 05:50 |
organized in MasterSpec divisions, and
I'll just find the folder that I need.
| | 05:54 |
Division 9, and then plaster, and gypsum
wallboard, and then find the gypsum board
| | 05:59 |
here at the bottom.
There's gypsum wallboard in Section.
| | 06:04 |
I'm going to open that.
And if you look over here on the list, not
| | 06:08 |
only did this load over here they gypsum
family but all of these different sizes.
| | 06:13 |
I'm going to use the 5 8ths type and zoom
in here towards the bottom, click my first
| | 06:18 |
point and start to drag.
This is a two-click family.
| | 06:22 |
It's what we call a line based family.
So you pick once and you go the other end
| | 06:27 |
here and you pick again.
And it creates the component.
| | 06:33 |
Let's repeat.
Let's click our first point there.
| | 06:37 |
Come down here.
And our next point there.
| | 06:40 |
So what that does is it draws the drywall,
complete with the stippling, it gives you
| | 06:44 |
all of the detail information about the drywall.
| | 06:49 |
It just does it with a 2-dimensional
component, so you're not actually modeling
| | 06:52 |
the drywall, you're just, you know,
representing it here 2-dimensionally.
| | 06:56 |
Let's do a few more components.
Component tool > Load Family > Detail
| | 07:02 |
Items.
I'm going to go into Woods and Plastics,
| | 07:05 |
Then Millwork, and then I'm going to take
this mill work, standard mill work in
| | 07:10 |
section.
This is just a standard wood board, and
| | 07:13 |
I'm going to open that.
Now, this one has a bunch of sizes
| | 07:16 |
available if you scroll through the list.
And so what you can do is just sort of
| | 07:20 |
scroll through here and find the size you want.
| | 07:22 |
I've got a 5 inch partition here.
I'm going to choose a 1 by 6 which will be
| | 07:26 |
just a little bit wider than that.
Click OK.
| | 07:28 |
And this is going to give me a nice wood
cap that I can use up here at the top.
| | 07:33 |
I'm going to tap the space bar to rotate it.
| | 07:35 |
And I'm going to place it right there.
And now I have this nice little wood cap
| | 07:40 |
at the top of my wall. Okay?
| | 07:43 |
Again, return to the Component tool.
Let's Load Family.
| | 07:47 |
And I'm going to bring in one more.
I'm going to go to Detail Items.
| | 07:50 |
And then I'm going to go to Furnishings.
And then, under Case Work.
| | 07:54 |
In case work, we have a Countertops folder.
| | 07:58 |
And there's a Counter top in Section
Family right there.
| | 08:01 |
I'm going to open that up and its pointing
opposite of the way that I want so what
| | 08:05 |
I'm going to do is just get it lined up
with the top of the countertop here and
| | 08:08 |
click.
Cancel out of the command, zoom in a
| | 08:12 |
little bit.
Now, I'm going to mirror it on itself.
| | 08:16 |
So I'm going to select this object come up
here and click the Mirror tool on the
| | 08:20 |
Modify tab.
And make sure you uncheck the Copy check
| | 08:24 |
box right there.
When I do that, it will mirror and delete
| | 08:29 |
the original.
So it'll, it'll mirror the actual object
| | 08:32 |
instead of making a copy of the object.
Now, I'm going to move it from this point
| | 08:37 |
over to this point.
And then you can either stretch this grip
| | 08:43 |
to lengthen it or, actually, your Align
command will work again here.
| | 08:48 |
If we go to align and I pick the leading
edge right there and then the edge of
| | 08:51 |
this, it will actually stretch it out to
match the length that we have there.
| | 08:56 |
So you can see where I can use the
underlying model to help me build these
| | 09:00 |
detail components on top.
Now, none of this geometry that I've added
| | 09:05 |
on top actually appears in the model.
It's all just 2D geometry that we've
| | 09:08 |
layered on top, and you could certainly
add other things.
| | 09:11 |
You could add caulking in there, you could
add wood base at the bottom, and you could
| | 09:14 |
add blocking over here.
All of those components can be found in
| | 09:18 |
that detailed items library, but I'm going
to go forward here and just add a few
| | 09:21 |
notes to kind of finish up this detail.
So if we go to the Annotate tab, we've got
| | 09:27 |
our Text tool right here.
Now, the Text tool can be created with or
| | 09:31 |
without a leader.
So the default doesn't have a leader and
| | 09:34 |
if I just sort of click right here.
(SOUND) And type in a note.
| | 09:40 |
What you want to do is type your note and
then click next to it to complete the
| | 09:43 |
note.
You could see that that will just create
| | 09:46 |
the piece of text.
Or you can click one of these options here
| | 09:50 |
with the leaders.
And I'll do this two segment leader.
| | 09:54 |
And click where you want to point to.
Click where you want the elbow to be, and
| | 10:01 |
then where you want the note to go, and
then type your note.
| | 10:06 |
Don't forget to click Next to it to
complete the creation of the note.
| | 10:10 |
And you could continue to type additional notes.
| | 10:14 |
And then that first note that we created,
it's actually possible to select it.
| | 10:18 |
And then up here on the ribbon, we can add
a leader after the fact.
| | 10:21 |
So I'm going to click this little plus
sign here for a leader on the left and
| | 10:24 |
then I could take these little grips and I
can point to the location where I want
| | 10:27 |
that leader to go.
And you can fine tune the position of this
| | 10:32 |
text and you can even.
Add a little elbow here like so to make it
| | 10:35 |
a little more consistent with the rest of
the notes.
| | 10:38 |
So if necessary you can add other notes
and dimensions and other detailed
| | 10:41 |
components to finish up your detail.
But the basic process of crating a detail
| | 10:45 |
in Revit usually involves making a section
cut somewhere in the model to get you
| | 10:49 |
started.
And then overlaying on top of that a
| | 10:52 |
series of 2-dimensional detail components
and text notes.
| | 10:56 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Collaborating with OthersImporting a CAD file| 00:00 |
While you may have chosen to do all of
your work in Revit, some of the colleagues
| | 00:03 |
and coworkers that you have working in
other firms, or even in your own firm, may
| | 00:07 |
have chosen to work in other programs such
as AutoCAD or MicroStation.
| | 00:12 |
Well, Revit understands the file formats
used by these other programs.
| | 00:16 |
It can import and export to DWG and DGN.
And so in this movie, I'd like to show you
| | 00:21 |
the process of importing data that was
created in AutoCAD to use here in your
| | 00:24 |
Revit project.
So let's say that the site plan for our
| | 00:28 |
restaurant building here was created in
AutoCAD, that our civil engineer is
| | 00:31 |
working in AutoCAD.
They've sent us a DWG file and we want to
| | 00:35 |
be able to bring that DWG file in and use
it here in our project.
| | 00:40 |
So, I'm in a file called Link CAD, and I'm
looking at the level 1 floor plan, and I
| | 00:42 |
think it would make a little more sense to
work in the site plan for this process.
| | 00:47 |
So, I'm going to double-click Site Plan,
and you can see that I get a simplified
| | 00:50 |
view of the building.
We're looking down on the building, now,
| | 00:53 |
so you're just seeing the roof.
And let me go ahead and zoom out a little
| | 00:56 |
bit to give myself some room to work.
Now, on the insert tab, I'm going to
| | 01:00 |
choose the Link CAD button.
Now, it's possible to actually link a CAD
| | 01:05 |
file or import a CAD file, but, generally
speaking Link CAD is the preferred method.
| | 01:11 |
And one of the main advantages of Link CAD
is, that later if my civil engineer sends
| | 01:15 |
me an updated version of the CAD file,
I'll simply be able to refresh and get
| | 01:18 |
those changes.
I won't have to repeat the whole process
| | 01:23 |
all over again, so that's one of the Key
advantages of using link cad.
| | 01:27 |
Here's a file, site plan.
I'm going to select it.
| | 01:30 |
Notice down here under files of type that
you can do dwg or dxf or dgn.
| | 01:35 |
So, there's several, several different
formats that you can choose from, so just
| | 01:38 |
make sure you choose the appropriate files
of type before you start but, we've got a
| | 01:42 |
dwg here.
I'm going to accept most of the default
| | 01:45 |
options but, let me just talk through a
few of them.
| | 01:49 |
You can change the colors all to black and
white if you want to.
| | 01:52 |
I'm going to preserve them in this case.
You can bring in just some of the layers
| | 01:55 |
in the file.
I'm going to bring in all of the layers.
| | 01:58 |
Layers are the way that cad files are
organized, so it might have a few layers,
| | 02:01 |
it might have dozens or hundreds of
layers, so sometimes it's nicer to specify
| | 02:05 |
if you don't want to get all of them.
In this case, I only have a few, so I'm
| | 02:09 |
going to bring them all in.
Import units, usually Revit will do a good
| | 02:13 |
job.
It will interpret the file correctly.
| | 02:16 |
If for some reason it doesn't, just undo,
go back out, and choose either feet or
| | 02:19 |
millimeters or whatever the unit might be,
but in this case, I'm going to leave it
| | 02:22 |
auto-detect.
I'm going to leave this correct lines
| | 02:26 |
feature.
That's a nice feature that corrects some
| | 02:28 |
things that are slightly inaccurate in the
file and prevents an error message from
| | 02:32 |
occurring, so that's usually a pretty good idea.
| | 02:35 |
For positioning, if you know for sure that
the owner of this file worked with the
| | 02:39 |
same origin as you, you can choose origin origin.
| | 02:43 |
In this case I'm not certain that's the
case, so I'm just going to bring it center
| | 02:46 |
to center and then move it after it comes in.
| | 02:49 |
So usually it's a pretty safe bet to do
that, but you can try origin origin, see
| | 02:52 |
what you get.
I'm going to orient it to view at level
| | 02:56 |
one, and then finally, over here, you can
tell it to be current view only, which
| | 02:59 |
means that the file will come in and
display only in the view that you're in.
| | 03:05 |
So if I bring it in the site plan, that's
the only view it would show in.
| | 03:08 |
If you leave that unchecked, then it's
going to show in all views.
| | 03:11 |
Regardless of the kind of data it is,
it'll treat it like it's part of the
| | 03:13 |
models.
So that's what I'm going to do in this
| | 03:15 |
case.
I'm going to leave that unchecked.
| | 03:17 |
So I'm going to go ahead and click open.
And you're going to see that site plan
| | 03:21 |
data come in.
And of course, it's in the wrong spot.
| | 03:24 |
You can see it here.
It's right on top of my building.
| | 03:26 |
When you move your mouse next to it, you
see it highlights with this big rectangle
| | 03:29 |
around it.
That's the CAD file.
| | 03:31 |
So when you click it, you're going to
select the whole thing.
| | 03:34 |
This blue dash line represents my property line.
| | 03:37 |
So what I want to do is move that into
position relative to my building.
| | 03:42 |
So I'm going to move it roughly first and
then I'll fine tune that position.
| | 03:45 |
So I'm going to go to my move command
right here.
| | 03:48 |
And notice that I can snap to point in the
CAD file, so that's a really powerful
| | 03:52 |
feature of this technique is that even
though it's data created outside of revit,
| | 03:56 |
revit still can snap to the points in
there very accurately.
| | 04:02 |
So let's click that end point and I'm
going to snap that exactly to column line
| | 04:07 |
'A' one.
Now, that's just a rough starting point
| | 04:10 |
you could see that it gives me lots of
room on the right side of the building and
| | 04:13 |
no room on the left.
So I'm going to go to move again and pick
| | 04:18 |
any old point and I'm going to move it
over to the left ten feet.
| | 04:21 |
So I'll just type in 10 and now I'm a
little bit better centered.
| | 04:26 |
Now, I'm going to zoom in so we can get a
better look, and again, I'm, building is a
| | 04:29 |
little bit off here, and I've got some
room in the back.
| | 04:33 |
So let's try moving it down.
So I'm going to pick any old point, move
| | 04:37 |
is straight down.
And I'm going to move it down about six
| | 04:40 |
feet.
And now you can see that, that gives me a
| | 04:43 |
little bit of room right here to the set
back line, a little bit of room in the
| | 04:46 |
back.
So, I'm fitting on my property line
| | 04:50 |
correctly now.
We'll zoom out.
| | 04:53 |
I've got the neighboring street.
I've got the parking lot.
| | 04:55 |
If I come up here and I click the default
3D view, the birdhouse icon, you can see
| | 04:59 |
that this site plan is going to show in
any view I look in.
| | 05:04 |
So here it is in 3D.
It's flat.
| | 05:06 |
It's a flat 2D drawing, but it still
displays here in 3D.
| | 05:10 |
That's because we did not check that
current view only.
| | 05:13 |
Had we checked the current view only
checkbox, it wouldl not show here.
| | 05:16 |
It really depends on how you're intending
to use the CAD file, whether or not you
| | 05:19 |
want to check that box.
Again, like I said, a really important
| | 05:23 |
benefit to this process is, if I come over
here to the Insert tab, I have this Manage
| | 05:26 |
Links button.
I can click that.
| | 05:30 |
And under CAD formats, there's my site plan.
| | 05:33 |
So if my civil engineer calls me and says,
I've sent you a new copy of the site plan,
| | 05:36 |
you want to reload it.
All I have to do is click it here and
| | 05:40 |
choose the reload button right there and
it will bring in the latest data.
| | 05:44 |
So that's a really useful technique to
employ to make sure you've always go the
| | 05:48 |
latest copy.
So if you're getting CAD files from
| | 05:51 |
outside sources that weren't created in
Revit It's real easy to bring them in.
| | 05:56 |
Link CAD is really the way to go, because
then, if necessary, you can update and get
| | 05:59 |
the latest version anytime you're sent a
new copy of the file.
| | 06:04 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Importing an image file| 00:00 |
In this movie we're going to talk about
importing image files into your Revit
| | 00:03 |
project.
We're going to take a short break from our
| | 00:05 |
resturant project for this one.
And I made a file called import image, and
| | 00:08 |
it was just created from the default
archetectural template.
| | 00:12 |
And there's no geometry in here just yet.
Now you might want to import image files
| | 00:16 |
for any variety of reasons, these are just
Bitmap files that were created either from
| | 00:19 |
a digital camera or your scanner.
They might be site photographs that you
| | 00:23 |
took or existing condition photographs
that you want to place on a title block
| | 00:26 |
and print out with the set, or maybe you
scanned an old drawing and some old
| | 00:29 |
blueprints that you've found for the
building from years ago and you want to
| | 00:32 |
use those as a basis to start your project.
| | 00:36 |
Whatever the case may be, any of those
image files that you have handy you can
| | 00:39 |
bring them in and use them for reference
in your Revit project.
| | 00:43 |
So for this example, I found an old
hand-drawn building addition that was
| | 00:47 |
created a long time ago and I put it on
the scanner and I created an image file of
| | 00:50 |
it.
Now, it's just a really simple one room
| | 00:54 |
addition, but it will give us An example
of the process that we want to follow here
| | 00:56 |
to bring in an image file.
So the steps are pretty simple.
| | 01:01 |
We just go here to the insert tab.
And on the import panel, we're looking for
| | 01:05 |
the image button.
So go ahead and click that.
| | 01:08 |
And you can see here that I've got this
file called scan.
| | 01:11 |
And down here are the file formats that
Revit supports.
| | 01:14 |
So it can be a bmp, a jpeg, a png, or a
tif file.
| | 01:18 |
So if you can create any one of those file
formats, then you should be able to import
| | 01:21 |
the image in just fine.
I'm going to click open and you'll get
| | 01:25 |
this x appearing on your cursor.
Now you can see here that mine's a little
| | 01:29 |
bit large.
It's going right off the screen.
| | 01:31 |
What I usually do is I just go ahead and
click it to see what it gives me.
| | 01:35 |
And then of course you can see the image appears.
| | 01:37 |
And considering that this is a couple
hundred feet here, about 150 feet, the
| | 01:41 |
image came in quite large.
So what you want to do next is, zoom out a
| | 01:46 |
little bit to find the edges of it, and
there are these little grips right here.
| | 01:50 |
And I'm going to just grab that and shrink
it down to a more reasonable size.
| | 01:56 |
Then I'll zoom in, and what we want to do
is size this thing precisely.
| | 02:03 |
We also might want to rotate it.
If if wasn't, you know, if it's a little
| | 02:06 |
bit skewed.
And it looks like it's a little bit off.
| | 02:09 |
So what I'm going to do is start with the rotate.
| | 02:12 |
And I'm going to click the rotate button
right here.
| | 02:14 |
And I'm just going to rotate it off-axis first.
| | 02:17 |
It's actually easier to rotate it
precisely if you start with a more
| | 02:20 |
dramatic rotation than if you try to
rotate it just a little bit.
| | 02:24 |
Next thing I'm going to do is click rotate
again, and you see this little blue dot
| | 02:27 |
here?
This is the center of rotation.
| | 02:31 |
Now, I can click right on that dot, and
that allows me to change where that center
| | 02:34 |
is.
And I'm going to zoom in over here, and I
| | 02:36 |
want that center to be as close as
possible to the corner of that building as
| | 02:39 |
I can get it.
Then this line right here, that you can
| | 02:44 |
move around, is your starting angle.
So I want to line that up as close as I
| | 02:49 |
can with the edge of one of the walls in
this file and click.
| | 02:55 |
And then you start moving, and Revit
should be able to snap exactly vertical by
| | 03:00 |
just moving the mouse slightly to the left.
| | 03:04 |
And then I'll click again, and now you
could see that that wall is pretty close
| | 03:08 |
to vertical.
Now, bear in mind that a scan might be a
| | 03:12 |
little bit off.
The paper might have stretched in one way
| | 03:15 |
or another.
So it may never be perfectly square.
| | 03:18 |
So you're going to have to maybe do two or
three tries at this to get it.
| | 03:23 |
As close as you can, but the goal is to
get it as roughly square as you possibly
| | 03:27 |
can.
The next goal is to do the same thing with
| | 03:31 |
scale.
Now again your not going to scale it
| | 03:33 |
perfectly, there's no object snaps for an
image file, so your going to have to get
| | 03:37 |
as close as you can, zoom in, and try to
do your best job here.
| | 03:42 |
I've got the file still selected, and then
here's your scale button right here.
| | 03:46 |
So I'll click that.
And what you do is you can either scale
| | 03:50 |
graphically or numerically.
Now, numerically is only good if you know
| | 03:55 |
you want to scale it two times or three
times, so graphical is what we want to do
| | 03:58 |
here.
Now, I've got a dimension right here that
| | 04:01 |
says that it's 20 feet.
But that says plus or minus, so maybe
| | 04:04 |
that's not a great choice.
This one over here says 24 foot 9.
| | 04:07 |
That also says plus or minus, so we might
have to just make a judgement call here.
| | 04:12 |
Let's go with the 20 feet.
It's probably pretty close to that.
| | 04:16 |
And what I'm going to do is click my
little start point right there, okay?
| | 04:21 |
Now, that's as close as I can get to that corner.
| | 04:24 |
Again, it won't snap.
The next thing you're doing is stretching
| | 04:29 |
out to a distance in the image that you
want to start with.
| | 04:35 |
Now you see it's trying to snap on me here.
| | 04:37 |
What I want to do is zoom in a little bit
so that I can get it as close to that
| | 04:41 |
other corner as possible, so there it is
right there, and I'm going to click.
| | 04:49 |
Now, let me zoom back out.
Notice that that current distance is about
| | 04:54 |
43 foot 6.
As I start to drag my mouse down, that
| | 04:57 |
number reduces.
And you can see that the image is scaling
| | 05:01 |
accordingly.
Now, all I have to do is, if you look
| | 05:04 |
carefully at that dimension, notice it's
that bold blue color again.
| | 05:09 |
So that's a listening dimension, which
means that all I have to do is type in the
| | 05:13 |
value that I want.
So what I want is whatever that distance
| | 05:17 |
was between those two points.
I want to make it 20 feet.
| | 05:21 |
So I'll just put in 20, press enter, and
now the file is scaled and rotated as
| | 05:26 |
accurately as I can get it for a bitmap image.
| | 05:32 |
We've got that file in there now.
And then basically it's up to you to
| | 05:35 |
decide what to do with it.
If it's just here for reference, then
| | 05:39 |
you're fine.
You can put it on a sheet, you can print
| | 05:41 |
it.
If you really want to though, you could
| | 05:44 |
actually go to your wall command here and
you could change the type to an
| | 05:47 |
appropriate type.
And you could literally.
| | 05:52 |
Start to trace over this.
Now, because there's dimensions in the
| | 05:56 |
underlying file, I could actually type
those numbers in to get this a little bit
| | 06:01 |
more precise, so I can use that for
reference and start to type in these
| | 06:05 |
values to make this as accurate as possible.
| | 06:10 |
And, you know, we can continue around and
you can see that it's already a little bit
| | 06:13 |
off.
And we'll just kind of go here and then
| | 06:17 |
here.
But you can see that it's not too bad.
| | 06:21 |
You can bring in an image file for a
variety of reasons.
| | 06:24 |
You can either use it as an underlay to
start tracing and creating a Revit version
| | 06:27 |
of an old project or you can use it for
site photographs that you want to print
| | 06:30 |
along with the set Whatever the purpose of
bringing in those image files, the process
| | 06:33 |
is fairly straightforward.
You can bring it in, rotate and scale it,
| | 06:39 |
and then it can be printed right alongside
with your other project.
| | 06:43 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating ceilings and lights| 00:00 |
As your project progresses, there'll come
a time when you need to begin sharing your
| | 00:04 |
model with other folks on the design team,
be they internal members of the design
| | 00:07 |
team working in the same firm as you or
outside consultants at other firms.
| | 00:12 |
Now, some of those firms will be working
in Revit.
| | 00:15 |
And some of them will be working in other programs.
| | 00:17 |
Let's assume that your MEP engineer is
working in Revit and you want to prepare
| | 00:20 |
your model, and get it ready to send off
to them, so they can start doing the
| | 00:23 |
engineering work.
Well that means that since most of their
| | 00:27 |
work is going to involve the ceiling, you
might want to get your ceiling plan
| | 00:30 |
up-to-date before you send it off to them.
So in this movie I'd like to look at the
| | 00:35 |
process of adding ceilings and lights to
your model.
| | 00:39 |
So I made a file called ceilings and
lights, and I'm currently in the level one
| | 00:42 |
floor plan.
And I'm just going to come down here on
| | 00:44 |
the project browser.
And make sure that I'm working in a
| | 00:47 |
ceiling plan instead.
So I'm going to come over here and open up
| | 00:53 |
Level 2 Ceiling Plan.
Let's zoom in a little bit and we're
| | 00:57 |
going to add a ceiling in this big open
space right here.
| | 00:58 |
Now we're just going to focus on the basic
steps of the process and we're not
| | 01:01 |
going to get too carried away with making
a terribly elaborate ceiling, so this will
| | 01:04 |
be a fairly basic ceiling that we're
going to create here, okay?
| | 01:08 |
So, the first step is to just add the
ceiling object.
| | 01:10 |
So we're going to come up to the
Architecture tab and click on the Ceiling
| | 01:13 |
tool.
The default behavior for the ceiling
| | 01:17 |
object is to automatically generate the
shape of the ceiling from the surrounding
| | 01:21 |
walls.
So if you notice that my cursor currently
| | 01:24 |
has the circle with the line through it
what this is basically telling me is that
| | 01:27 |
there's no enclosed boundary.
If you look down at the status bar at the
| | 01:32 |
bottom of the screen, it says, click in an
area bounded by walls to create the
| | 01:35 |
ceiling.
So notice that if I move my mouse into
| | 01:38 |
this enclosed area that suddenly it finds
the boundaries surrounded by those walls.
| | 01:45 |
This is what the automatic ceiling option
is doing.
| | 01:48 |
If ever you wanted to create a ceiling
that's not bounded by wall shapes, you can
| | 01:51 |
go to the sketch ceiling option instead.
But in this example, I'm going to stick
| | 01:56 |
with the automatic ceiling.
Now before I click in here, I want to
| | 01:59 |
check the settings over on the properties pallet.
| | 02:02 |
So over here on the Properties pallet, you
can see that.
| | 02:05 |
We have a couple different types of
ceiling we can choose from.
| | 02:08 |
We have a two by two, a two by four,
acoustical tile and a 5/8ths drywall
| | 02:12 |
ceiling.
Now, I'm going to choose the two by two
| | 02:16 |
acoustical tile ceiling for this example.
It's going to constrain that ceiling to
| | 02:21 |
level two since we're in the level two
reflected ceiling plan.
| | 02:24 |
And it's got a height that it's going to
set that ceiling at relative to level two.
| | 02:29 |
Now I'm going to drop this height down a
little bit to 10 feet and press Enter.
| | 02:34 |
Now remember, 10 feet is really only going
to be on this left side of the plan right
| | 02:38 |
here where the balcony is.
Over here on the right side, we have a
| | 02:42 |
double volume space, and so the ceiling
will actually be much taller over there.
| | 02:46 |
Now you can just highlight the space and
just click anywhere and that will create
| | 02:50 |
the ceiling.
Now we just need the one ceiling, so I'm
| | 02:53 |
going to go ahead and click the modify
tool to cancel out of there.
| | 02:57 |
And if you move your mouse back into the
ceiling, notice that each one of these
| | 03:00 |
little gridlines here actually highlights
on screen.
| | 03:04 |
Now you can select any gridline.
And shift the grid pattern if necessary.
| | 03:09 |
So let's say you wanted to shift the whole
pattern over one tile or half a tile or
| | 03:12 |
something like that.
You could simply use the move command to
| | 03:15 |
do that.
Revit centers it in the space as best it
| | 03:18 |
can by default, but you can always move it
later if you don't like it.
| | 03:22 |
You can also rotate it.
So let's say that I wanted the ceiling to
| | 03:25 |
be rotated like that.
All you have to do, is use the Rotate
| | 03:29 |
command and pick your angle and it will
rotate the entire grid.
| | 03:33 |
I'm going to undo that and stick with the
rectilinear grid.
| | 03:37 |
So, those are certainly options that you
can do to modify the ceiling.
| | 03:40 |
So I'm going to stick with the basic
ceiling here, and then the next thing I'm
| | 03:43 |
going to do is start adding light fixtures.
| | 03:46 |
Now, the light fixture is just another
component family in Revit.
| | 03:50 |
Which means that we use the component
button to add them.
| | 03:53 |
So I'm going to click on component and
over here on the properties palette, I"ll
| | 03:56 |
scroll through the list.
And down here toward the bottom I have a
| | 04:00 |
troffer light lens lamp that I can add.
So I'm going to add the troffer light
| | 04:05 |
lens, and I'm going to do the two by four,
two lamp, hundred and twenty volt.
| | 04:09 |
Unit, so there it is right there.
And notice that again I get the circle
| | 04:13 |
with the line through it.
If you look at the status bar this time,
| | 04:16 |
it's telling me to click on a ceiling to
place an instance, so this is a ceiling
| | 04:20 |
hosted light fixture.
So the only way you can add it is if
| | 04:24 |
there's a ceiling underneath your cursor.
So, I'm just going to sort of move over
| | 04:29 |
here somewhere and I'm going to place it
roughly in this location here down by the
| | 04:33 |
corner of the screen.
Now, I'm going to just place one, because
| | 04:38 |
I'm going to use my modify tools.
Move, copy, rotate, align, things like
| | 04:44 |
that to position and create multiples.
So I just need the one.
| | 04:49 |
I'll cancel out the command with the
modify tool or press Esc twice.
| | 04:53 |
The next thing I want to do is zoom in on
this general location.
| | 04:57 |
And I'd like this first light to be about
three tiles away from both walls.
| | 05:01 |
So I really need this corner to be right here.
| | 05:05 |
Now I could use the Move command, or the
Align command for this.
| | 05:08 |
If you want to use the Align command you'd
go to Modify click on Align.
| | 05:13 |
You'd pick the grid line you want to line
up with, and then the edge of the light
| | 05:17 |
fixture.
If you prefer to use Move you can just
| | 05:21 |
select the light fixture, go to Move.
Snap right to that end point.
| | 05:27 |
And then snap it down to the intersection.
A line command, move command, doesn't make
| | 05:32 |
a difference.
As long as you get the light fixture
| | 05:35 |
snapped directly into that location, it
should be fine.
| | 05:39 |
Now, I'm going to zoom out slightly here.
And we could go to copy next.
| | 05:45 |
Make sure that multiple is turned on.
Pick a base point.
| | 05:49 |
And then just count tiles.
So, if I want to make sure that I'm
| | 05:52 |
leaving four tiles in between, I can put
the next one right there, and then four
| | 05:56 |
tiles in between.
And the next one right there, and four
| | 06:00 |
tiles in between.
And the next one right there.
| | 06:03 |
That does a pretty good job.
Now, that's fine to create those first
| | 06:07 |
four that way, but I wouldn't want to then
create four more and then four more, that
| | 06:10 |
would be awfully tedious.
So what I want to do is cancel out of that
| | 06:14 |
command, make sure you're not clicking on
a grid, but clicking one of the empty
| | 06:18 |
spaces here and hold the mouse down and
start to drag.
| | 06:23 |
Now when you drag from left to write, we
call that a window selection.
| | 06:28 |
And a window selection has to completely
surround the objects that you're
| | 06:33 |
selecting.
If you don't completely surround them
| | 06:36 |
they're not selected but, if you do they
get completely selected.
| | 06:40 |
Now, if you go right to left it's a
different kind of selection and it will
| | 06:44 |
grab too much stuff.
So, this is why you want to make sure that
| | 06:48 |
you're going From left to right and select
only the four light fixtures.
| | 06:54 |
Now if you prefer, you can hold the
control key down and click each of the
| | 06:57 |
four.
At this point, I could go back to copy and
| | 07:01 |
pick my base point and my new point or, I
could use array.
| | 07:06 |
Array is a multiple copy command and
there's a few ways we can use the array
| | 07:10 |
command, but array might be a faster way.
To create copies of these lights across
| | 07:15 |
the entire ceiling plane.
So I have my four lights selected and then
| | 07:19 |
I'm going to click the Array button, right here.
| | 07:23 |
And if we look at the options bar, there's
a lot of settings that we can use with the
| | 07:27 |
array command.
So, it can be either a linear or a radial
| | 07:31 |
array.
I want to make sure that we're choosing
| | 07:33 |
linear.
We can group and associate the array,
| | 07:36 |
which means that you'll be able to later
make changes to the array and it will
| | 07:40 |
update accordingly.
Or, you can do a one-time multiple copy
| | 07:46 |
using the array.
So basically the difference is, if you've
| | 07:50 |
got that box checked, you create a
parametric array that you can manipulate
| | 07:54 |
ongoing, anytime, even after you've closed
the file an reopened it.
| | 07:59 |
If you uncheck that box you're doing a one
time Multiple copy.
| | 08:03 |
Now in this case, all I really need is a
one-time multiple copy so I'm going to
| | 08:07 |
uncheck Group and Associate.
You want to put your quantity in here, so
| | 08:11 |
how many items do I want?
If you look at your plan here and you do a
| | 08:15 |
quick count I should be able to fit about
eight rows of lights, so I'm going to put
| | 08:18 |
eight in there.
And then, the move to is asking about the
| | 08:23 |
points you're going to click on the screen.
| | 08:26 |
You're going to click point one and point two.
| | 08:29 |
Is point one and two representing the
distance to the second row, or is it
| | 08:32 |
representing the distance to the final row?
| | 08:35 |
In this case, its going to to be the
second row I think its going to be easier
| | 08:38 |
to click.
So I'm going to choose that.
| | 08:41 |
And then as a further fail-safe if you
want to, clicking constrain will force
| | 08:45 |
your cursor to only move horizontally or vertically.
| | 08:49 |
So if I click that it keeps me from
accidentally moving off at a diagonal.
| | 08:54 |
Now let me zoom in a little bit here, and
I'm going to pick my start point right
| | 08:57 |
there.
And then I want three tiles in between,
| | 09:00 |
one, two three.
Which means my endpoint is right there.
| | 09:05 |
And when I click, it will create the
series of copies, and each of the next
| | 09:09 |
series of copies is another three tiles away.
| | 09:13 |
And if I zoom all the way out, you can see that.
| | 09:18 |
My 8 rows of lights completely fill in the
available space.
| | 09:22 |
So creating a ceiling layout first
involves creating the actual ceiling
| | 09:26 |
plane, because you require the host for
your light fixtures.
| | 09:31 |
So you start with your ceiling frame.
It can have a pattern for the.
| | 09:35 |
Two by two tile or it can be just a plain
drywall, ceiling.
| | 09:38 |
So you can have any material you want
applied to it, and then adding light
| | 09:42 |
fixtures is just a simple component family.
| | 09:45 |
You add them in, and then using your
Modify Tools.
| | 09:48 |
Things like copy and array and rotate, is
how you position multiple lights
| | 09:52 |
throughout the plan.
So you can make very short work of the
| | 09:56 |
task, of creating your typical reflective
ceiling plan.
| | 09:59 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Linking another Revit file| 00:00 |
There's lots of reasons why you might
choose to link a Revit project to your
| | 00:03 |
exisitng project.
When you create a link to a Revit project
| | 00:06 |
you're embedding an entire Revit projct
into your current project.
| | 00:11 |
It will come in as a single object that
you can move around and position relative
| | 00:14 |
to the geometry in your existing project.
And then, if the owner of that original
| | 00:20 |
Revit linked file makes changes to that
file, you can come back later and reload
| | 00:24 |
the link and capture those latest changes
to that file.
| | 00:30 |
So, there's lots of times when you might
choose to use this procedure and it might
| | 00:34 |
involve collaboration on a project with
other disciplines like other engineers and
| | 00:38 |
so forth.
Perhaps they're going to work in Revit.
| | 00:42 |
You're going to work in Revit.
And you both link your files together.
| | 00:45 |
If you're doing a multi-building campus
project, each building might be a separate
| | 00:48 |
linked file.
So there's a lot of scenarios where it
| | 00:51 |
would be appropriate to do your work in
multiple Revit projects and then link them
| | 00:54 |
together for coordination.
So in this movie, what I'm going to do, is
| | 00:58 |
link in an MEP model that was created with
the HVAC system for this building.
| | 01:04 |
And then we'll take a look at how that
comes in and then use that as a
| | 01:07 |
coordination tool going forward.
So, I'm in a file called Link Revit and
| | 01:12 |
I'm just in the Level 1 Floor Plan
currently, and what I want to do is bring
| | 01:15 |
in this MEP model.
So I go to the Insert tab, and then here
| | 01:20 |
I'm going to click the Link Revit button.
Then I bring up the browse window and any
| | 01:25 |
of the Revit projects that I have
available will be shown.
| | 01:29 |
And I'm going to select this one here,
called MEP Model.
| | 01:33 |
Now, if you watched the movie on linking
CAD formats, there was a whole bunch of
| | 01:35 |
options down at the bottom of the dialog.
But you'll notice here, when we link on
| | 01:39 |
Revit project, there's only one option, Positioning.
| | 01:41 |
Where do you want it to go?
Well, hopefully, if you're coordinating
| | 01:44 |
with an MEP engineer, the two of you have
coordinated you origin.
| | 01:48 |
So, in this case, I'm going to choose auto
origin to origin, and that will mean that
| | 01:52 |
the two files will line up perfectly with
one another.
| | 01:56 |
They share a common origin.
I'm assuming that the engineering file was
| | 02:00 |
created from the architectural file.
And usually the, that will, make sure that
| | 02:04 |
the origins match.
If they don't match, you can always just
| | 02:07 |
move the file after it comes in.
But let's give this a try.
| | 02:09 |
I'm going to go ahead an click Open.
A message is appearing that there's a
| | 02:14 |
nested link that's going to be invisible.
So the MEP engineers started with an
| | 02:18 |
architectural model as the background, so
they're not going to recreate all of the
| | 02:21 |
architecture.
They actually use linking as well to
| | 02:24 |
create their model from.
So they started with an empty project,
| | 02:28 |
they linked in the architectural model,
and then they built their ducts and other
| | 02:31 |
engineering data inside that model.
So what this message is telling me is,
| | 02:36 |
that Revit is only going to bring in the
MEP model.
| | 02:40 |
It's going to leave behind the
architectural model.
| | 02:42 |
And that's perfectly fine.
So I'm going to click Close here.
| | 02:46 |
This particular view, it doesn't look like
anything happened.
| | 02:49 |
Well, all of the HVAC stuff is happening
up above the ceiling.
| | 02:53 |
So this is really not the best view for us
to see the result of what we just did.
| | 02:59 |
We might want to open up a section here or
a ceiling plan.
| | 03:02 |
One of those views would give us a better
look at what just happened.
| | 03:06 |
Now if you want to verify that a file
actually did get linked in, you can come
| | 03:10 |
over here to the project browser.
Scroll down.
| | 03:13 |
And at the very bottom of the browser is
the Revit links option.
| | 03:17 |
If you expand that, you can see that
there's an MEP model listed there and it's
| | 03:21 |
got this little blue down arrow next to it.
| | 03:24 |
That's how we know that, that model is
loaded, and it's currently active in the
| | 03:28 |
file.
If it had a red x it would be telling us
| | 03:31 |
that it was unloaded.
So this one has the blue arrow, that means
| | 03:34 |
it's basically ready to go.
So let's take a look at where that file
| | 03:37 |
is.
I'm going to scroll back up.
| | 03:40 |
And there's two places we might want to
check out.
| | 03:42 |
Let's try the ceiling plan.
So I'm going to do level two ceiling plan.
| | 03:46 |
And you'll notice that a series of
diffusers and returns are appearing here
| | 03:49 |
on the ceiling plan now and they're in
those colors, so they're real easy to see.
| | 03:55 |
Those are the Revit link models.
So if I put my mouse over here, you could
| | 03:58 |
see it wants to highlight the ceiling, but
if I press the Tab key, at some point the
| | 04:02 |
message will say Revit link.
And if I click, notice that all of those
| | 04:07 |
highlight and there's that box that
surrounds the thing.
| | 04:11 |
If you zoom out, you can kind of see it
right there.
| | 04:14 |
That's the Revit link.
So you can see the Revit link is
| | 04:16 |
superimposed directly over our
architectural file and it appears right
| | 04:20 |
there.
If you double-click this section head,
| | 04:24 |
that's another way that you can see this
MEP information.
| | 04:28 |
It's right there.
So again, if I highlight these lines right
| | 04:31 |
here, that outline appears up there, and
we click on them and we can see that MEP
| | 04:35 |
information that has been added to our project.
| | 04:40 |
Linking in a Revit project is a fairly
simple process to achieve and it's a great
| | 04:43 |
way for you to coordinate your efforts
with other users who are also using Revit,
| | 04:47 |
be they external consultants working
outside your firm or other users within
| | 04:50 |
your firm, if you're doing a multi
building project.
| | 04:56 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Performing an interference check| 00:00 |
Not only Revit does allow us to link two
Revit projects together to help us
| | 00:03 |
coordinate our efforts with other members
of our team, but it actually provides a
| | 00:06 |
coordination review tool that we can use
to look for interferences between the
| | 00:10 |
geometry in the two models.
So in this movie I'm going to do a
| | 00:14 |
coordination review between our model and
the MEP model that we linked in the
| | 00:18 |
previous movie.
So, here I am in a file called
| | 00:21 |
Coordination Review, and I'm in a section
view at the moment, and our linked model
| | 00:25 |
is right here, this blue element right there.
| | 00:28 |
And that's the duct work that our MEP
engineer has added to project.
| | 00:33 |
So, what I want to do is see if that duct
work is interfering with any of the
| | 00:37 |
architectural or structural geometry that
I might have in my model.
| | 00:42 |
So I'm going to go over to my Collaborate tab.
| | 00:44 |
Now I should mention that if you're using
Revit LT, the Collaborate tab is not
| | 00:48 |
available.
So you won't be able to perform this
| | 00:51 |
interference check directly within Revit LT.
| | 00:54 |
But it other members of your team are
using full versions of Revit, they can
| | 00:57 |
perform the coordination check and report
back to you.
| | 01:00 |
So over here on the Coordinate panel, we
have an Interference Check drop-down, and
| | 01:05 |
I'm going to click that and choose Run
Interference Check.
| | 01:10 |
So in the interference check dialog that
appears, you have two columns of
| | 01:15 |
categories.
And both are labeled Categories From with
| | 01:19 |
the drop down.
Now, you can actually run the interference
| | 01:22 |
check within your current project and
choose categories with both sides.
| | 01:27 |
So if you wanted to check your walls
against your structural members or your
| | 01:30 |
ceiling objects against your equipment,
you could actually run the interference
| | 01:35 |
check within the same project.
But in our case, what we want to do is put
| | 01:40 |
the current project on one side and the
MEP model on the other.
| | 01:46 |
So notice that I'll change the list of
categories that are available and it will
| | 01:49 |
show me those MEP categories on the right
hand side.
| | 01:54 |
And it keeps the architectural categories
here on the left.
| | 01:57 |
Now you can check more and more categories.
| | 01:58 |
But in this case I'm most interested in
coordinating what's going on with my
| | 02:02 |
ceiling.
So, I want to see how we're doing with our
| | 02:05 |
light fixtures.
So, I'm going to check my light fixtures
| | 02:09 |
over here and then on this side I want to
check all the boxes.
| | 02:13 |
So, I can click this button down here at
the bottom to select the entire list and
| | 02:16 |
then just check any one of the boxes and
that will check all of them.
| | 02:21 |
So, I'm going to coordinate light fixtures
on the left side with all of the MEP
| | 02:25 |
objects on the right.
When I click OK, Revit will run the
| | 02:29 |
interference and generate a report.
And you can see here in the interference
| | 02:35 |
report that I've got this list of four
clashes that it identified.
| | 02:40 |
Now, if you select one of these, they
actually highlight in the model, but as
| | 02:43 |
you see in this section view that I'm in,
I'm not really seeing anything highlight.
| | 02:49 |
You can use this show button here.
I'm going to start with air terminals,
| | 02:52 |
here at the top, and I'm going to click show.
| | 02:54 |
And it will start with the current view
that I'm in.
| | 02:58 |
But each time I click show.
It will show me a different view.
| | 03:03 |
Now, this view I like better, this
reflected ceiling plan view.
| | 03:07 |
And you can even click over here and start
to zoom in.
| | 03:11 |
So notice the object that highlighted
there in orange, that's the object that
| | 03:15 |
has the interference.
So I can click through each of these.
| | 03:20 |
And you can see that in those cases, the
two air terminals are exactly in the same
| | 03:24 |
spot as the light fixtures, and the flex
duct in that same two locations is also a
| | 03:28 |
problem.
Not too bad, just four clashes, but still
| | 03:33 |
we need to resolve those before we can
continue with the project.
| | 03:37 |
So I'm going to close this, and then get
on the phone and have a discussion with my
| | 03:40 |
engineer, and we'll talk about how to fix things.
| | 03:43 |
So let's assume that we had a productive
discussion with our engineer and they have
| | 03:47 |
made updates to their model.
So what I can do is, I'm going to scroll
| | 03:51 |
down here on the project browser, and
there's my MEP model right there.
| | 03:56 |
I'm going to right-click on it and choose
Reload From.
| | 04:01 |
If you choose Reload, it just reloads with
the same file name, but if I choose Reload
| | 04:06 |
From, I get a Browse window and I can
point to a new version of that file.
| | 04:12 |
So, I've got another version of the MEP
model called MEP Updated.
| | 04:17 |
So, we're going to select that, click Open.
| | 04:21 |
It'll give me that same message about the
architectural model that we saw in the
| | 04:24 |
previous movie.
This is fine, I'm going to click OK, or
| | 04:27 |
Close rather.
Notice that those two air terminals and
| | 04:31 |
flex ducts have moved over.
And now, more importantly, I'm going to
| | 04:35 |
just click somewhere to deselect that.
If I come over here to the interference
| | 04:40 |
check, and say show last report, and then
click here to refresh it.
| | 04:47 |
(SOUND) Notice that when it refreshes all
of the clashes are gone.
| | 04:50 |
So we've achieved the goal of every
project, and that is to be 100% clash
| | 04:54 |
free.
Now, naturally if we ran a different
| | 04:57 |
interference check on different categories
we might discover other problems.
| | 05:01 |
But you can see how powerful this tool can be.
| | 05:04 |
It allows you to pick and choose the
categories that you want to run the
| | 05:07 |
interference against and it allows you to
avoid problems that are really easy to
| | 05:11 |
avoid here in software and prevent them
from becoming really expensive problems
| | 05:15 |
out in the field.
| | 05:18 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Creating OutputCreating sheets| 00:00 |
At some point in every project you need to
print out a document set.
| | 00:04 |
So in this movie I'd like to talk about
working with sheets, both creating new
| | 00:06 |
sheets and working with the existing ones
that you already have here in the project.
| | 00:11 |
And we'll set up those sheets and get them
ready to print out as a set of documents.
| | 00:15 |
So I'm in a file here called sheets.
And I'm just looking at the prospective of
| | 00:19 |
the dining room here for a moment.
But if we scroll down here on the project
| | 00:23 |
browser, you will see the sheets branch on
the browser, and there are several sheets
| | 00:27 |
already here in this project.
Now if you followed through this course
| | 00:32 |
since the beginning, then you recall that
we started this project with the
| | 00:36 |
commercial default template.
That comes with the software.
| | 00:40 |
And that template included all of these
sheets to begin with.
| | 00:43 |
Some of these sheets even already have
views on them, so you can tell the
| | 00:46 |
difference with the ones that have the
little plus sign next to them.
| | 00:50 |
So this sheet right here, A1 first Floor
is empty.
| | 00:54 |
But this sheet here, A2 first floor
reflected ceiling plan, has the ceiling
| | 00:58 |
plan view on it.
Now if you click the little plus sign you
| | 01:01 |
can see which view is actually already on
that sheet.
| | 01:04 |
So here's the level one ceiling plan.
This one's got the roof plan on here.
| | 01:08 |
This one' has two elevations, north and
south, and this one has east and west.
| | 01:13 |
Now most of the other sheets are empty
there's a few others down here.
| | 01:17 |
If you double-click any of these sheets
and open them up, like let's try A4,
| | 01:21 |
you'll see that it includes a title block
here, and then, of course, it's got the
| | 01:25 |
two views right there and right there.
When I open up this sheet, I immediately
| | 01:32 |
notice that I've got this red line here
shooting off into space.
| | 01:35 |
And if I highlight that, I see that the
viewport is very wide.
| | 01:40 |
Now the reason for that is if we go back
to our first floor plan, level one floor
| | 01:44 |
plan.
We have that site plan that we brought in
| | 01:49 |
from the dwg file link, dwg file.
Now, it may not be necessary to show that
| | 01:54 |
site plan in the elevation views.
So, you have two solutions to the problem
| | 01:59 |
of that red line that's shooting off into
space there.
| | 02:03 |
One thing that we can do is we can open up
each of the elevations.
| | 02:06 |
I'll start with east.
And we can just simply hide that dwg file
| | 02:11 |
in this view.
So, the way that you would do that is to
| | 02:15 |
use visibility graphics.
So, if I go back to the view tab, click on
| | 02:19 |
visibility graphics, come over her to the
import categories, I can just uncheck the
| | 02:23 |
site plan.
Click OK, and it will hide that side plan.
| | 02:29 |
When I do this is the east elevation come
back down here to the elevation sheet.
| | 02:34 |
Open up A5.
Notice that this one, the view part has
| | 02:38 |
immediately resized to conform to the new shapes.
| | 02:42 |
So as soon as you make that change this
view part adjust itself.
| | 02:46 |
Now if you want to see that side plan.
Lets say there is a information that you
| | 02:50 |
wanted to see in this view.
The alternative approach is to open up
| | 02:54 |
that view, and actually I can do it right
from the indented sheet.
| | 03:00 |
So let's go to A4, and you remember this
one is way off the screen.
| | 03:03 |
You can double-click the north or south
elevation directly right here, so this one
| | 03:08 |
up at the top is the south elevation, so
I'll double-click on it and you can see
| | 03:11 |
that view.
And again, instead of hiding this, what
| | 03:16 |
you could do instead is come down here and
turn on the crop region.
| | 03:21 |
And you see how large that becomes?
Because it's large enough to include that
| | 03:24 |
entire CAD file.
So now I can take the crop region and pull
| | 03:28 |
it in And see I'm keeping part of that CAD
file displaying right there.
| | 03:34 |
And then I can hide it again.
But now that view is cropped.
| | 03:39 |
But I'm still seeing the portion of the
CAD file that I care about.
| | 03:43 |
And then if I come back here to A four,
you can see that it's adjusted to fit the
| | 03:47 |
screen.
So either one of those techniques is
| | 03:49 |
perfectly fine.
So you can do either one, whichever one
| | 03:52 |
appeals to you.
And that's one way that you can start
| | 03:55 |
adjusting the views for the sheets.
So you do want to go through each of the
| | 03:59 |
sheets that are already here and see if
there's any of those fine-tune adjustments
| | 04:03 |
you need to make.
The next thing you'd want to do is look at
| | 04:07 |
sheets that are empty, like this A1.
Now, this is supposed to be for the first
| | 04:12 |
floor plan, but there's no floor plan on
here yet, so all we have to do Is, scroll
| | 04:16 |
up here.
And locate our first floor plan, our Level
| | 04:21 |
1 floor plan.
Drag it, and you see the little plus sign
| | 04:24 |
on my cursor?
Let go when you see that plus sign and we
| | 04:28 |
can see that it's a little bit too large,
so we've got the same problem again.
| | 04:32 |
I'm going to just click to place it to see
what the issue is.
| | 04:35 |
Now, I probably don't need to see all of
this over here.
| | 04:39 |
I'm more interested in just this portion
of the floor plan.
| | 04:42 |
Furthermore, you might argue that you
don't really need to see the site plan at
| | 04:46 |
all in the first floor plan.
That really where you'd want to see that
| | 04:49 |
is in the site plan view.
So you have the same two choices that I
| | 04:52 |
just showed you for the elevations.
You can either go into this view.
| | 04:58 |
Hide the DWG file.
Or you can go into this view and turn on
| | 05:02 |
cropping.
Whichever one you do is perfectly fine.
| | 05:05 |
But those are the two choices.
Now I'm going to right click here and show
| | 05:09 |
you a faster way to get to That view.
We can choose this Activate View.
| | 05:15 |
That will gray out the title bar in the
background and put me directly in the
| | 05:20 |
view.
So now I could go to visibility graphics
| | 05:23 |
and turn it off or I could go to the crop
region and crop it down.
| | 05:28 |
That's what I'm going to do here.
So I'm going to turn on the crop region,
| | 05:31 |
zoom out a little bit Take my crop.
I'll show just part of the street.
| | 05:37 |
I'll show just part of the parking.
Pull that in a little there.
| | 05:42 |
Pull it up a little bit right there.
Right click, deactivate the view and then
| | 05:47 |
I can drag this view port.
To fit on the sheet.
| | 05:52 |
This title bar now is way too long so i
will just stretch it down like so and so
| | 05:56 |
that deals with that problem.
So going back down and looking at the
| | 06:01 |
sheets list as you scroll through here and
begin working on each of those sheets that
| | 06:05 |
are already here you may find some that
are missing.
| | 06:09 |
If you find that are missing its really
easy to create the new one.
| | 06:13 |
So what you do is you come up here and you
right click on the sheets branch and you
| | 06:16 |
can choose new sheet.
It will offer you two different title
| | 06:21 |
blocks here.
If you don't see the title block you want,
| | 06:23 |
you can always load other ones.
I'm going to choose the e size to match
| | 06:27 |
the sheets that are already here, I'll
click OK.
| | 06:29 |
It will suggest the name C2, so revet just
simply looks at the last sheet that was
| | 06:34 |
created.
C1 was apparently the last sheet that was
| | 06:37 |
created.
And it numbers the next one in sequence.
| | 06:41 |
If you click right on this title block,
you can click on those labels and renumber
| | 06:45 |
directly.
So I'm going to call this one A14, and
| | 06:49 |
then for the name I'm going to call this
seating plan.
| | 06:53 |
And what I'm going to do here is bring in
those call outs that I created, those
| | 06:57 |
enlarged dining room plans.
Drag it and Drop it.
| | 07:02 |
There's level one.
Drag it and Drop it.
| | 07:07 |
Here's level two.
Now, looking here I can see that they're
| | 07:10 |
not quite lined up correctly, so I'll just
drag this slightly.
| | 07:16 |
And you'll see the little dashed line
appear when they're line up across one
| | 07:19 |
another.
Then I'll select both of them.
| | 07:23 |
And just pull 'em down to fit on the sheet.
| | 07:25 |
And then finally I can grab just this
little title bar right here and drag it
| | 07:28 |
down to line it up with the one next to it.
| | 07:31 |
And you could continue the process to
create or configure other sheets.
| | 07:36 |
Now, let's jump back over to level one.
What I want to show you here is if I zoom
| | 07:41 |
in on this little call out right here
that's attached to our seating plan,
| | 07:45 |
notice that it has filled in the drawing
number and the sheet number that
| | 07:49 |
corresponds to that sheet that I just
placed it on.
| | 07:55 |
All of the cross coordination between the
various views and the sheets that they're
| | 07:59 |
on will happen automatically in revet.
So, as you begin adding all of the
| | 08:03 |
sections and the details to the various
sheets, all of these callits are going to
| | 08:07 |
fill in themselves.
Setting up your sheets is obviously the
| | 08:10 |
first step that you want to do before
getting ready to print out a set.
| | 08:14 |
It's a fairly straightforawrd process.
You can use the standard title blocks, you
| | 08:17 |
can load in other ones, and it's just a
drag and drop process to bring those
| | 08:20 |
various views onto the sheets and get them
ready for printing.
| | 08:23 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Plotting a set of documents| 00:00 |
So we're ready to share our project with
some outside recipient, and we'd like to
| | 00:04 |
print out a set.
To do that, we can just go directly to
| | 00:07 |
print, and print really any of the views
that we like in our project.
| | 00:10 |
But, the most common way to print out a
project is to print the sheets.
| | 00:15 |
So, in the last movie we looked at setting
up sheets, and if you followed along
| | 00:18 |
there, then you've seen the process and we
set up a bunch of sheets.
| | 00:22 |
And so now we're ready to print out those
sheets and present them to a recipient.
| | 00:26 |
So I'm in a file called plotting and I'm
looking at sheet A1 at the moment and I'm
| | 00:29 |
going to zoom in on it, just so we can
talk about a few things when we get to the
| | 00:33 |
print dialog.
So let me just zoom in and put it over
| | 00:37 |
here for the time being.
And to get to the print command, we're
| | 00:41 |
going to go to the Application menu.
So if you recall that's the big R menu
| | 00:45 |
over here, we'll just click that.
We'll come down and highlight print, don't
| | 00:49 |
click on it, we're just going to highlight
it there.
| | 00:51 |
And you actually have three commands here:
print, print preview, and print setup.
| | 00:56 |
Now it turns out you can get to print
preview and print setup from the print
| | 00:59 |
dialogue.
So I'm going to do everything in this one
| | 01:01 |
dialogue right here.
So I'm going to go To print here and I'll
| | 01:05 |
click that.
Now the dialog will appear and I'm going
| | 01:08 |
to move it out of the way so we can see
that zoomed in portion of the drawing that
| | 01:11 |
we had open in the background.
The first thing you want to do is choose
| | 01:15 |
your plotting.
Now I'm just choosing Adobe PDF at the
| | 01:18 |
moment, so I'm going to make a digitial
plot, and naturally the choices that I
| | 01:21 |
have on my list will vary from the ones
you that you have on your list.
| | 01:25 |
It really depends on what kind of printing
device you have available.
| | 01:29 |
But Revit can print to any device laser
printer, an ink jet printer, a full size
| | 01:32 |
plotter.
So you want to choose the device that you
| | 01:35 |
typically print from, and if necessary,
you click over here on the properties
| | 01:39 |
button and configure the device specific
settings for that device.
| | 01:44 |
So naturally, the options that would be
available over here on properties will
| | 01:47 |
vary depending on what you choose here.
So the next area you want to consider is
| | 01:51 |
this print range area.
Now there's three options here, now
| | 01:54 |
current window would do the entire sheet
that I have opened up on screen out to its
| | 01:58 |
full extents.
Because I've zoomed in on a smaller area
| | 02:04 |
of the view, however I could also choose
the visible portion of the current window,
| | 02:08 |
and if I chose that then rabbit will only
print the part that I'm zoomed in on.
| | 02:15 |
Or, I could choose this option here, which
is usually the most common option,
| | 02:19 |
selected views and sheets.
That's going to give me a list and I'm
| | 02:23 |
going to be able to choose one or more
views or sheets that I want to print.
| | 02:28 |
So if I click the Select button here, I'll
get a complete list that's available here.
| | 02:33 |
Now you can actually save lists, so I
previously created one called Current
| | 02:36 |
Sheet Set, and if you scroll down here,
you'll see some of the items are checked
| | 02:40 |
and of course of course some of them are not.
| | 02:45 |
Complete Sheet Set is actually doing one
of the sheets and none of the views.
| | 02:51 |
Notice down here we have two filters.
If I wanted to, I could bury this sheet
| | 02:55 |
set a little bit.
Let's say I'm only interested in the plans
| | 02:58 |
and the elevation.
So I could uncheck the sections, uncheck
| | 03:01 |
all of this other stuff here.
In fact you can hold down the Shift key
| | 03:05 |
and do a selection, and uncheck that way.
It's a little faster.
| | 03:10 |
Once I do that, I can do Save as.
And so now I have two different sets.
| | 03:18 |
This one, which is just the plan and
elevation sheets.
| | 03:21 |
And this one, which is the complete sheet set.
| | 03:24 |
So, whichever one you want.
You can choose it off the list and it just
| | 03:27 |
makes the selections a little easier the
next time you come in this dialogue.
| | 03:30 |
Let me click okay.
Now, I mentioned that we could get to page
| | 03:34 |
set up from the print dialogue.
So here's the button right here and let me
| | 03:38 |
move this out of the way as well.
It confirms again that I am using a Adobe
| | 03:43 |
PDF at the top.
For the paper size I have lots of choices,
| | 03:46 |
so right now I am using ARCH E1 which is
my full size sheet here.
| | 03:51 |
But I could also choose any of the other
sheet sizes that are available may be I
| | 03:55 |
want to go down to a tabloid and do a 50% reduction.
| | 03:59 |
Maybe I really want to reduce it down just
to a letter size, but I'm going to stick
| | 04:03 |
with Arc E1, the full size sheet, and then
what you want to do down here under Zoom
| | 04:07 |
is make sure that Zoom 100% is chosen.
If you choose Fit to Page, it will
| | 04:13 |
actually scale the sheet to fit the
available paper, and even on Arc E1, that
| | 04:16 |
might actually force it to scale slightly
and it might be a little bit off.
| | 04:22 |
So always make sure that you do Zoom 100%.
If you want to do a half-size set, do zoom
| | 04:28 |
50%.
So there's a couple different ways that
| | 04:31 |
you can approach this, but I'm going to
stick with 100% here.
| | 04:34 |
Now, over here on the right-hand side, I
want to stick with landscape orientation.
| | 04:38 |
Vector processing is usually higher
quality for line drawings.
| | 04:41 |
So I'm going to stick with that, since
most of my drawings are line drawings.
| | 04:45 |
I have a couple renderings or, 3d views
that are shaded.
| | 04:48 |
So that's where these quality settings
come in, but I'm just going to accept the
| | 04:51 |
defaults, right there.
Now, down here under options, we have a
| | 04:54 |
few really interesting options.
Now, we don't have all of these items in
| | 04:59 |
our project, but generally speaking, if
you see an element on screen, it will
| | 05:03 |
print.
The few exceptions are the ones that say
| | 05:07 |
"hide" right here.
We don't have any scope boxes or reference
| | 05:11 |
planes shown in the current view, so it
doesn't matter what we choose there, but
| | 05:14 |
we do have a crop boundary and an
unreferenced view tag.
| | 05:19 |
Now the unreferenced view tag is this guy
right here.
| | 05:22 |
That view tag is not yet on the sheet, so
that's considered an unreferenced view
| | 05:27 |
tag.
Compare that to the section marker here,
| | 05:30 |
and this call out right here, those are
reference view tags.
| | 05:34 |
So, if I check this box, Revit will hide
this one when it prints, but these two
| | 05:38 |
will continue to display.
You don't want to get a phone call from
| | 05:42 |
your recipient asking you where this
detail is if you didn't include it in the
| | 05:45 |
set.
Now, the crop region is a little bit off
| | 05:48 |
the screen, but you remember that that's
that rectangle that surrounds the drawing
| | 05:52 |
that drops it down to a certain size.
If you have this box checked, even if you
| | 05:58 |
forgot to turn it off, it still plots invisible.
| | 06:02 |
So that's a handy one to keep checked.
So I'm going to check Hide Unreferenced
| | 06:06 |
and Hide Crop Regions.
And then when I click Okay here in Page
| | 06:09 |
Setup, it will ask me if I want to save
these settings for future use.
| | 06:14 |
Now you can do that and give it a name
that would appear right here.
| | 06:17 |
So if these are your most common settings
and you want to use them over and over
| | 06:20 |
again, go ahead and say yes.
In this case, I'm just going to say no to
| | 06:24 |
save a few clicks, and then if I'm ready
to print, I like everything I see, I can
| | 06:28 |
click Okay and make the print.
So in my case, I'm just going to click
| | 06:32 |
Close, but feel free to click Okay and
actually generate a paper plot or a PDF,
| | 06:36 |
whatever printer you've chosen, and see
what the final result is.
| | 06:40 |
So, as you can see the process of going
through the Print dialog and and the Page
| | 06:43 |
Setup dialog is fairly straightforward.
It's pretty similar to other Windows-based
| | 06:48 |
programs.
And once you get the settings the way you
| | 06:50 |
want, a nice, neat feature to Revit is you
can save not only the list of views and
| | 06:54 |
sheets as you're printing for future use,
but you can also save all the settings in
| | 06:58 |
the Page Setup dialog for future use.
And that makes your work in there that
| | 07:03 |
much quicker the next time.
| | 07:05 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting the model| 00:00 |
Another way you might want to output data
from your other projects is to export it
| | 00:03 |
to other file formats.
So, rather than printing out on paper or
| | 00:07 |
in some sort of digital plot format, you
can actually export a model in DWG or DGN
| | 00:12 |
format.
Whatever view is active when you run the
| | 00:16 |
Export command will determine what kind of
data you're going to get.
| | 00:21 |
In other words, if you're in a floor plan,
when you export to a DWG format for
| | 00:25 |
example, you're going to get a flattened
two dimensional floor plan on the
| | 00:29 |
recipient side.
If you're in the 3D view, you're going to
| | 00:33 |
get an actual 3D model on the recipient
side, so depending on what your recipient
| | 00:37 |
needs from you, from your Revit model, you
can choose accordingly.
| | 00:42 |
So, I'm just in a file called Plotting,
and what we're going to do is scroll up
| | 00:46 |
here on the project browser and find a
view that we want to export.
| | 00:50 |
So, let me select the level one floor
plan, open that up, and I'll zoom in
| | 00:53 |
slightly, and maybe I just want to export
this floor plan as I see it right here.
| | 00:58 |
So I'm going to go up to the application
menu, the big R menu.
| | 01:02 |
Highlight export.
And then you'll see lots of choices for
| | 01:06 |
export formats we can choose.
I'm going to come up here to CAD formats,
| | 01:10 |
and then you can see there's four
different formats that i can export to.
| | 01:14 |
I'm going to choose DWG, that's probably
the most popular CAD format.
| | 01:18 |
So I'll choose that.
And then it will show me a preview of of
| | 01:21 |
the view that I have opened.
And if I'm perfectly happy I could go
| | 01:26 |
right to next.
But you might want to look at a few of the
| | 01:29 |
other settings that are here.
Let's take a look.
| | 01:31 |
Up here it say's Export setup.
Now you might have saved export setups in
| | 01:37 |
this list here.
There's a small browse button right next
| | 01:40 |
to it.
And I'm just going to show you the
| | 01:42 |
dialogue but we're not going to change anything.
| | 01:43 |
Because it's quite a bit of stuff in here.
All of these settings are things that are
| | 01:47 |
meaningful on the CAD side.
For example, CAD files use layers to
| | 01:50 |
organize the information.
Revit uses categories.
| | 01:54 |
So what you've got here is a list of all
the Revit categories.
| | 01:57 |
And what layer they're going to get mapped
to on the CAD side.
| | 02:00 |
Now the layers that you see listed here
are coming from the American Institute of
| | 02:03 |
Architects standards.
Well I'm perfectly fine with that and I'm
| | 02:06 |
going to accept all of that without making
any changes.
| | 02:08 |
Blind styles.
If it's a dash line in Revit, which blind
| | 02:12 |
style do you want it to become in CAD.
Couple ways you could deal with that here.
| | 02:16 |
You could let Revit create automatic line
types or you could map them to specific
| | 02:21 |
line types from an AutoCAD line type file.
This is really in the realm of your office
| | 02:27 |
standards.
So again I'm going to just accept the
| | 02:29 |
settings here and you could talk it over
with your CAD or BIM manager.
| | 02:32 |
The same is true for hatch patterns.
The same is true for text and fonts.
| | 02:36 |
The same is true for how you want to treat colors.
| | 02:38 |
If you're exporting a 3D view, now we're
doing a 2D view right now.
| | 02:42 |
But if you're exporting a 3-D view, you
can change from poly mesh to ACIS solids.
| | 02:47 |
So it depends on what kind of 3-D geometry
you want it to have, how should it
| | 02:50 |
interpret units and coordinates and then
there's even some general settings at the
| | 02:54 |
very end.
So I'm not going to change any of these
| | 02:57 |
settings.
I'm just going to cancel out of this
| | 02:59 |
dialogue.
But, the point is that you have lots and
| | 03:02 |
lots of settings that you can configure
that control exactly how the Revit data
| | 03:06 |
will get interpreted when it comes out on
the AutoCAD side.
| | 03:11 |
So, I'm just going to click Next here, and
it will suggest a name for me, and I'll
| | 03:15 |
accept that and click "okay".
So if you have AutoCAD, you can go ahead
| | 03:21 |
an open up the file that was created an
take a look.
| | 03:24 |
So let me go to open.
An I'll select the file right here.
| | 03:28 |
It also exported the MEP model as a
separate linked-in file, but I'm just
| | 03:31 |
going to open up the default file.
And as you can see, there is the file
| | 03:36 |
right there, exported over to CAD.
Notice that these are just individual
| | 03:40 |
lines now.
AutoCAD doesn't have walls.
| | 03:43 |
The tables and chairs are just circles.
They're on the correct layers.
| | 03:46 |
If you go to 3D in this file.
I just want to stress that it's a
| | 03:50 |
flattened 3D view.
Whatever view you export from Revit,
| | 03:54 |
that's what you're going to get.
So, if we switch back over to Revit.
| | 03:58 |
If you wanted to give your recipient a 3D model.
| | 04:01 |
Then, what you would do, is, go first to a
3D view.
| | 04:05 |
Like, maybe this axonometric view here.
Go up to export.
| | 04:11 |
Repeat the process.
I'm going to accept all the default
| | 04:14 |
settings.
Go to next.
| | 04:18 |
Click Okay.
An then back here in CAD, open that up.
| | 04:26 |
An this time you'll see that I get a 3D model.
| | 04:30 |
However, I should stress that what it
created here was poly-faced meshes.
| | 04:35 |
They're not walls.
These are not Windows.
| | 04:37 |
So autoCAD doesn't understand the
architectural objects.
| | 04:42 |
Instead what you get is more generic three
D geometry.
| | 04:45 |
Now depending on what your recipient needs
to do with it, that might be perfectly
| | 04:47 |
fine.
So if you need to export your Revit model.
| | 04:52 |
Out to other formats, such as Autocad.
It's a very easy process.
| | 04:55 |
There are quite a few settings, but
fortunately, most firms have poured over
| | 04:58 |
those settings pretty extensively and
created standards to go along with that.
| | 05:03 |
So you can usually rely on somebody else
in the company to help you through getting
| | 05:07 |
the correct settings, but once you make
the export.
| | 05:11 |
The recipient on the other end will have a
CAD file that's properly layered base on
| | 05:14 |
the geometry that you created in your
Revit model.
| | 05:18 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Generating a cloud rendering| 00:00 |
This movie I want to talk about the
rendering capabilities in Revit.
| | 00:04 |
So, even though we can print the set or we
can export to DWG, sometimes you just
| | 00:07 |
want to create a nice rendering to present
the design and give it to your client or
| | 00:10 |
to discuss things among your internal team.
| | 00:14 |
So, here I am in a file called Plotting.
This is the same file we used in the last
| | 00:18 |
few movies, and I'm going to go to a 3D
view in here to talk about the rendering.
| | 00:23 |
So if you just open this file, you're
looking at this sheet here, A1.
| | 00:27 |
What you want to do is scroll down and
under the 3D views, you can really open
| | 00:30 |
any one of these 3D views, but I'm
going to choose this one here, Dining from
| | 00:33 |
Above.
It's kind of a dramatic view looking into
| | 00:38 |
the space.
The orientation of north in this project
| | 00:42 |
if we go back to level one floor plan,
north is up.
| | 00:46 |
So, this is the south portion of the
project and so, if we render with the
| | 00:49 |
sunlight we should be getting a lot of
nice light right in these windows right
| | 00:52 |
here.
So lemme close that view.
| | 00:55 |
And I'm back in here.
And so hopefully we're going to get a lot
| | 00:58 |
of nice sunlight right into this space.
Now, there's really three things you need
| | 01:02 |
to do a rendering.
You need a 3D view, which we have here.
| | 01:06 |
You need lighting.
And we're going to have both the sunlight
| | 01:08 |
coming in these windows, and we've got
these artificial lights if we want to turn
| | 01:11 |
them on.
And you need materials.
| | 01:14 |
Materials is just how all the objects will
be finished in the model.
| | 01:18 |
Now, we have not really done anything with
materials so far in this course.
| | 01:23 |
Some of the objects that we have on screen
have materials like you can see these
| | 01:26 |
window frames are using this wood material
and the chairs have this yellow color
| | 01:29 |
material and there is a stipple pattern on
the floor.
| | 01:32 |
So some of the objects do have material.
some of them have more generic materials
| | 01:37 |
so.
This will be, sort of a rough rendering,
| | 01:39 |
but it will give you an idea, of, the
capabilities of what's available in the
| | 01:42 |
software.
Now, I should mention that, if you're
| | 01:45 |
using, the full version of Revit, you're
going to have different capabilities than,
| | 01:48 |
those of you that are using Revit LT.
Both products can do rendering but, they
| | 01:52 |
do it a little differently.
The, full version of Revit has, in product
| | 01:55 |
rendering.
So, the way you would access that, is to
| | 01:59 |
go to the View tab.
And then here on the Graphics panel,
| | 02:03 |
you've got the render, a series of
rendering buttons, and this Render button,
| | 02:06 |
right here, would open up the Render dialog.
| | 02:09 |
So this is in product rendering.
And you can do a rendering directly here
| | 02:13 |
and generate it right in Revit.
Both products Revit and Revit LT have
| | 02:18 |
Render in Cloud.
So, that's another option that you have
| | 02:22 |
where instead of the rendering being
generated here on your local machine, the
| | 02:26 |
information from your local machine will
be uploaded to Autodesk 360.
| | 02:31 |
And then Autodesk will generate the
rendering for you using its Cloud servers.
| | 02:36 |
Now, what's the difference and why would
you choose one over the other?
| | 02:39 |
Well, if you have Revit LT, the only
option you have is render in cloud.
| | 02:42 |
But if you have the full version of Revit
,you could choose one or the other.
| | 02:46 |
In product rendering has a little bit more
options here in the dialog and settings
| | 02:49 |
that you can configure.
So you're going to have a little bit
| | 02:52 |
easier time to customize the result that
you're getting.
| | 02:56 |
But you're going to tie up your local
machine to do the rendering.
| | 02:59 |
Cloud rendering has a few less settings
that we can customize, but once the
| | 03:03 |
rendering has been uploaded, it happens off-line.
| | 03:07 |
We can keep working on our computer and
not tie up our machine and then we'll get
| | 03:10 |
an email from Autodesk when the rendering
is ready.
| | 03:13 |
So, you might want to try both.
There's pros and cons to each one.
| | 03:17 |
And again, if you're in LT, you only have
the cloud render.
| | 03:19 |
So, what I'm going to do is I'm going to
close out of here, and we're going to talk
| | 03:22 |
about the cloud render in this example.
And, before I actually generate the
| | 03:26 |
rendering, we want to get ourselves set up here.
| | 03:28 |
So we've got a 3D view that's taken care
off, like I say we are going to accept all
| | 03:31 |
the defaults for the materials.
So we're not really going to change any of
| | 03:35 |
that but I do want to just verify the
lighting settings.
| | 03:38 |
So let's take a quick look at how we get
to that.
| | 03:41 |
Now, if you come down here on the View
Control bar, there is this little blue
| | 03:44 |
cube right here.
This is the visual style popup, and if you
| | 03:48 |
click that, you can get to the Graphic
Display options.
| | 03:51 |
So the first area of this graphic display
options dialog.
| | 03:54 |
Has the Model Display options, which is
just a reiteration of the same choices
| | 03:58 |
that were available in this popup.
We also have several other categories of
| | 04:02 |
options we can configure as well, like for
instance shadows.
| | 04:05 |
So I'm going to turn on the shadows for
this rendering.
| | 04:08 |
And then lighting is what I'm most
concerned with.
| | 04:11 |
The Lighting options allow me to configure
whether or not I'm using sunlight or
| | 04:14 |
artificial light or both.
So I'm going to click this button right
| | 04:17 |
here next to Sun settings.
And that takes me to the Sun settings
| | 04:21 |
dialog.
Now, the lighting option is fairly
| | 04:23 |
generic.
You can see that it just chooses a generic
| | 04:25 |
angle for the sun and it's not very
realistic so, I'm not going to choose that
| | 04:28 |
one.
What I'm going to do instead is click on
| | 04:31 |
the Still option.
Now, you could choose the date of the year
| | 04:34 |
and the time of day and so on.
What I'm going to do is just choose one of
| | 04:37 |
these presets right here, the Summer
Solstice, and then I'm going to click OK.
| | 04:41 |
So now you'll see that changes to the
summer solstice.
| | 04:43 |
We're using the exterior sun only.
Now, it would be possible to also go to a
| | 04:48 |
configuration that uses the artificial lights.
| | 04:51 |
But in this case, I'm not going to do that
because it takes more rendering time.
| | 04:56 |
I will just render with the sunlight only.
If I open up this last option down here,
| | 05:02 |
the Background.
Because I don't have anything out the
| | 05:05 |
windows.
What I want to do is open up this list
| | 05:07 |
here, and choose something in the background.
| | 05:10 |
So I'm going to put a gradient fill in there.
| | 05:11 |
And I'll just except all these default
colors here.
| | 05:15 |
So when I click OK.
You're going to see way off in the
| | 05:17 |
horizon, you know, we get a gradient that
goes to that color, and then the sky kind
| | 05:20 |
of radiates up from there, so it at least
have something happening out the window.
| | 05:26 |
Now, you can notice here a little bit of
sunlight on the floor.
| | 05:30 |
because we did Summer Solstice and it's
noontime, the sun is pretty high in the
| | 05:34 |
sky.
So if you wanted to, you could actually
| | 05:37 |
reopen that Dialog, go back to Lighting,
click the Summer Solstice.
| | 05:42 |
I could duplicate that, Summer Solstice 2,
I'll just call that, Early Morning and
| | 05:49 |
then I could take this here.
And change it to about 10 am.
| | 05:56 |
So I've just selected the hour and I'm
clicking down a few times.
| | 05:59 |
I'll click OK.
And notice that brings the sun a little
| | 06:01 |
bit further in the space.
So the nice thing about being able to
| | 06:04 |
preview ahead of time is you can make a
decision about where you want that to be.
| | 06:09 |
And that might be a little bit more
interesting rendering, if we have a little
| | 06:11 |
more sun coming into the space.
So once I have that configured, then I'm
| | 06:15 |
ready to go ahead and generate the cloud rendering.
| | 06:18 |
Now, if you're in Revit LT, when you pick
the Visual Styles popup, you'll still have
| | 06:22 |
Graphic Display options, which will give
you essentially the same basic options.
| | 06:29 |
You can configure your lighting, and you
can configure your background, but you're
| | 06:33 |
also going to have this option right here
for the Online Rendering options.
| | 06:38 |
And that kind of gives you some similar
settings so you might need to configure
| | 06:43 |
both of those before you send your online rendering.
| | 06:47 |
So the last step is to click the Render In
Cloud button.
| | 06:50 |
Now, I should mention that you have to
have an Autodesk 360 account in order to
| | 06:53 |
use the Render In Cloud, and you have to
be logged into that account.
| | 06:58 |
If your not logged in when you click the
Render In Cloud button, it will ask you to
| | 07:01 |
log in.
I'm already logged in so it's going to
| | 07:04 |
take me right to the cloud rendering.
It's going to tell me what the steps are,
| | 07:08 |
I'll click Continue.
And then it's going to verify those
| | 07:13 |
settings for me.
So I'm doing my dining from above, I'm
| | 07:15 |
going to generate a still image.
I'm going to do the standard render
| | 07:19 |
quality.
It's usually a good idea to start with
| | 07:21 |
standard.
If you go to final.
| | 07:23 |
It costs.
It'll charge your account.
| | 07:25 |
But if you do a standard rendering, you
could do as many standard renderings as
| | 07:28 |
you want for free.
so, make sure that the settings are what
| | 07:31 |
you want first with the standard rendering.
| | 07:34 |
An then if you're happy with it, you can
do the final quality rendering, and it
| | 07:37 |
will charge you these uu, Cloud credits.
And you can talk to your Autodesk
| | 07:42 |
representative to figure out how to get
more Cloud credits, and so on.
| | 07:45 |
I'm going to accept all the defaults here:
the Medium Image Size, I'll do the
| | 07:48 |
Advanced Exposure, and I'm going to create
a PNG file.
| | 07:51 |
So I'm going to go ahead and click Start
the Rendering.
| | 07:53 |
And down here, it's going to email me at
my email address when the rendering is
| | 07:57 |
complete.
So I'll choose Start Rendering.
| | 08:01 |
After you receive the email from Autodesk
and your rendering is complete, you can
| | 08:05 |
get to it by going up here and clicking on
the render gallery.
| | 08:09 |
And so this takes me to my Autodesk 360
account and you can see a little preview
| | 08:14 |
image of the render here.
If I hover it I get a little menu that
| | 08:19 |
gives me some stats so I can see the
information about the rendering.
| | 08:24 |
And I get a small, little Menu icon right
here, that if you click on it, I can
| | 08:27 |
change the kind of rendering that I'm
doing, turn it into a panorama, do a solar
| | 08:31 |
study.
I can show the preview image, I can
| | 08:34 |
download it as an image, I can delete it,
and I can adjust the exposure.
| | 08:38 |
So let's go ahead and do the show preview
image here And you can see that's what my
| | 08:42 |
rendering is starting to look like.
not too bad.
| | 08:46 |
So if you're satisfied with it, you can go
back out to Revit and generate a higher
| | 08:50 |
resolution, more complete version.
If you're unsatisfied with anything in the
| | 08:56 |
rendering, then you can go in and make
adjustments to the materials or the angle
| | 08:59 |
or the lighting settings.
And generate as many standard renderings
| | 09:04 |
as you need to perfect it just the way you want.
| | 09:07 |
And when you're happy, you can generate
your final quality rendering.
| | 09:11 |
Now, if you do hav access to the full
version of Revit, and you want to learn
| | 09:14 |
more about rendering, we have an entire
class here at lynda.com devoted to
| | 09:16 |
rendering in Revit.
So feel free to check that out.
| | 09:19 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionNext steps| 00:00 |
So now that you've finished this course,
you may be looking for some other
| | 00:02 |
resources to help expand your knowledge.
I'd like to direct you to the sample
| | 00:06 |
project that comes with the full version
of Revit.
| | 00:10 |
Revit LT also has a sample project but
it's not this one, so, this sample project
| | 00:13 |
is only available for the full version.
And you can get to it by going to by going
| | 00:18 |
to the big R, highlighting Open And
clicking sample files right here.
| | 00:22 |
And then, the name of this file is just
called the r-a-c basic sample project.
| | 00:28 |
And i have it open here on screen.
And, that's included with full version, as
| | 00:31 |
I said.
This is a really handy little project.
| | 00:34 |
It has these little icons here, floating
around in the various views called help
| | 00:38 |
links.
And I'm going to zoom in on this.
| | 00:41 |
Schedule right here, which has a complete
list of all those help links.
| | 00:44 |
And basically the way this works is when
you click on one of these little icons,
| | 00:47 |
over here on the properties pallet, it'll
have a learning link.
| | 00:50 |
So for example let's look at the very
first one here, add levels to a project in
| | 00:53 |
the east elevation.
So I'm going to open up the east
| | 00:56 |
elevation.
And there's some learning links here.
| | 00:59 |
And if you click over here there would be
a small browser icon and that will take
| | 01:02 |
you out to the wiki help and outer desk
website, explain that feature, tell you
| | 01:06 |
the steps that are involved to use that
feature and so on.
| | 01:10 |
As you complete each of these learning
links you can check the little box here.
| | 01:15 |
And when you do so, if you go back to that
original schedule.
| | 01:19 |
It will begin telling you which ones
you've reviewed, so you can see here that
| | 01:23 |
one of those now says yes, and when all
the revieweds change from no to yes, then
| | 01:26 |
you know you've completed going through
the whole project.
| | 01:31 |
So there's a lot of really good
information in here, so you definitely
| | 01:33 |
might want to check that out, and you
already have that available to you, so
| | 01:36 |
it's right there.
In addition to that, there are plenty of
| | 01:40 |
online an offline resources.
The most obvious online resource that you
| | 01:44 |
have available to you is the lynda.com library.
| | 01:47 |
I would encourage you to check out Revit
Essential Training next.
| | 01:49 |
That's the full Revit Essential's course
that goes into much more detail on many of
| | 01:52 |
the topics that we've talked about here
and many other topics as well.
| | 01:56 |
We have several other Revit courses.
We have the Revit Family Editor; we have a
| | 01:59 |
Revit rendering.
So, feel free to check all those out.
| | 02:02 |
And then, just explore; do a Google search.
| | 02:05 |
Check out my website, paulaubin.com.
And, have fun learning Revit.
| | 02:09 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
